Quarterlytics / Consumer Cyclical / Food Distribution / Metcash Limited

Metcash Limited

mts · ASX Consumer Cyclical
Claim this profile
Ticker mts
Exchange ASX
Sector Consumer Cyclical
Industry Food Distribution
Employees 5001-10,000
← All annual reports
FY2011 Annual Report · Metcash Limited
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
M

E

T

C

A

S

H

L

I

M

I

T

E

D

A

N

N

U

A

L

R

E

P

O

R

T

2

0

1

1

www.metcash.com

Collective

Annual Report 
2011
STRENGTH

Independent

SPIRIT

 
 
 
 
M

E

T

C

A

S

H

L

I

M

I

T

E

D

A

N

N

U

A

L

R

E

P

O

R

T

2

0

1

1

www.metcash.com

Annual Report 

Collective

2011

STRENGTH

Independent
SPIRIT

 
 
 
 
P r i ce
&  
Ran g e

Metcash Limited
Metcash is Australia’s leading wholesale 
distribution and marketing company specialising 
in grocery, fresh produce, liquor, other fast 
moving consumer goods and hardware. We thank 
our diverse network of customers, suppliers, 
employees and the community for making Metcash 
the company it is today.

Business Model

LINKED TOGETHER 

IN THE SPIRIT OF THE 

INDEPENDENTS • GIVING INDEPENDENT RETAILERS THE SUPPORT TO GROW.

• DEFENSIVE QUALITIES OF OUR BUSINESS AS WE SELL EVERYDAY NEEDS.

• RESILIENCE OF OUR BUSINESS MODEL AS WE PROVIDE WORLD CLASS 

  LOGISTICS, BUYING STRENGTH, MARKETING & BRAND-BUILDING 

  AND THE RETAILER PROVIDES ENTREPRENEURIAL SPIRIT.

CORPORATE INFORMATION

Warehouses & Distribution
Our operations are supported by world class 
distribution, logistics and warehousing capabilities. 
Our logistical excellence is achieved through strong 
relationships with our suppliers and investment in 
technology and infrastructure, enabling reduced 
costs and greater effi ciencies.

Australian Liquor Marketers (ALM)
ALM is a broad range liquor wholesaler supplying 
hotels, liquor stores, restaurants and other licensed 
premises throughout Australia and New Zealand. ALM 
also markets three major independent retail brands 
across Australia.

Mitre 10

In March 2010, Metcash acquired a 50.1% stake in 

the Mitre 10 Group. Mitre 10 is the second largest 

business in the Australian home improvement and 

hardware industry. It operates as a wholesale supplier 

to the independently owned Mitre 10 retailers who 

sell home improvement and hardware products.

Community

Key to our success is being part of the community 

and understanding what matters to local 

consumers. We support the communities in which 

we live through our engagement programs by giving 

back through donations and other support.

ABN 32 112 073 480

DIRECTORS

Peter Barnes (Chairman)

Andrew Reitzer (CEO)

Fiona Balfour

Michael Butler

Neil Hamilton

Edwin Jankelowitz

Richard Longes

V Dudley Rubin

COMPANY SECRETARY

Greg Watson

REGISTERED OFFICE

50 Waterloo Road

Macquarie Park NSW 2113

Telephone: 61 2 9751 8200

SHARE REGISTER

Boardroom Pty Limited

GPO Box 3993

Sydney NSW 2001

Telephone: 61 2 9290 9600

Facsimile: 61 2 9279 0664

AUDITOR

Ernst & Young

INTERNET ADDRESS

www.metcash.com

Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

IGA DISTRIBUTION HEAD OFFICE

MITRE 10 HEAD OFFICE

CAMPBELLS WHOLESALE HEAD OFFICE

Ph: 61 2 9741 3000

Fax: 61 2 9751 8298

4 Newington Road

Silverwater NSW 2128

Postal Address

PO Box 6226

Ph: 61 3 9703 4200

Fax: 61 3 9703 4222

12 Dansu Court

Hallam VIC 3803

Postal Address

Locked Bag 10

NATIONAL OFFICE

Ph: 61 2 9751 8200

Fax: 61 2 9741 3027

50 Waterloo Road

Macquarie Park NSW 2113

Postal Address

PO Box 6226

Ph: 61 2 9751 8200

Fax: 61 2 9741 3055

50 Waterloo Road

Macquarie Park NSW 2113

Postal Address

PO Box 6226

HEAD OFFICE

Ph: 61 2 9741 3000

Fax: 61 2 9741 3009

4 Newington Road

Silverwater NSW 2128

Postal Address

PO Box 6226

Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

Doveton VIC 3177

AUSTRALIAN LIQUOR MARKETERS 

IGA Distribution (IGA>D)
IGA>D provides independent retailers with the 
brand, marketing and buying scale necessary 
to compete in a highly concentrated retail 
market. From its six major distribution centres, 
IGA>D distributes grocery products and general 
merchandise across Australia. IGA Fresh distributes 
fresh produce from eight major facilities and meat 
from its ‘state of the art’ centre in Western Australia.

Campbells Wholesale
Campbells Wholesale is a multi-format distributor 
of grocery, general merchandise, confectionery, 
foodservice and liquor products. It services small 
business customers and retailers across Australia, 
leveraging its ability to offer a supply solution to 
nationally based customers. 

Our Customers

Our success is measured by the success of our 

customers – the independent retailers. For the most 

part, these are business owners operating stores in 

their local neighbourhoods – the face of the business 

and part of the community. We support our customers 

by providing a quality offering of products and 

services, including our own private labelled products, 

at competitive prices, allowing them to compete and 

grow their own businesses.

Our People

Our people are the bedrock of our organisation. 

Crucial to our ability to support our customers is the 

continuous development and support of our internal 

human resources. Our staff are supported through 

talent management, leadership development, 

employee engagement and workplace relations.

The cover and text sections of this report are printed on Mega Recycled Silk A2+, an 

The back section of this report is printed on Grange Laser which is PEFC certifi ed. 

environmentally considered sheet consisting of 50% post consumer recycled waste 

With ISO 14001 EMS accreditation, this wood free sheet is also made elemental 

and 50% FSC certifi ed fi bre. Mega Recycled is manufactured at the mill, which has its 

chlorine free.

own waste water treatment plant and are ISO 14001 EMS approved. Mega Recycled 

is made elemental chlorine free.

D E S I G N E D   A N D   P R O D U C E D   B Y   D E S I G N A T E   I N V E S T O R

P r i ce

&  

Ran g e

Metcash Limited

Metcash is Australia’s leading wholesale 

distribution and marketing company specialising 

in grocery, fresh produce, liquor, other fast 

moving consumer goods and hardware. We thank 

our diverse network of customers, suppliers, 

employees and the community for making Metcash 

the company it is today.

LINKED TOGETHER 
IN THE SPIRIT OF THE 
INDEPENDENTS • GIVING INDEPENDENT RETAILERS THE SUPPORT TO GROW.

• DEFENSIVE QUALITIES OF OUR BUSINESS AS WE SELL EVERYDAY NEEDS.
• RESILIENCE OF OUR BUSINESS MODEL AS WE PROVIDE WORLD CLASS 
  LOGISTICS, BUYING STRENGTH, MARKETING & BRAND-BUILDING 
  AND THE RETAILER PROVIDES ENTREPRENEURIAL SPIRIT.

Business Model

Warehouses & Distribution

Our operations are supported by world class 

distribution, logistics and warehousing capabilities. 

Our logistical excellence is achieved through strong 

relationships with our suppliers and investment in 

technology and infrastructure, enabling reduced 

costs and greater effi ciencies.

Australian Liquor Marketers (ALM)

ALM is a broad range liquor wholesaler supplying 

hotels, liquor stores, restaurants and other licensed 

premises throughout Australia and New Zealand. ALM 

also markets three major independent retail brands 

across Australia.

Mitre 10
In March 2010, Metcash acquired a 50.1% stake in 
the Mitre 10 Group. Mitre 10 is the second largest 
business in the Australian home improvement and 
hardware industry. It operates as a wholesale supplier 
to the independently owned Mitre 10 retailers who 
sell home improvement and hardware products.

Community
Key to our success is being part of the community 
and understanding what matters to local 
consumers. We support the communities in which 
we live through our engagement programs by giving 
back through donations and other support.

IGA Distribution (IGA>D)

IGA>D provides independent retailers with the 

brand, marketing and buying scale necessary 

to compete in a highly concentrated retail 

market. From its six major distribution centres, 

IGA>D distributes grocery products and general 

merchandise across Australia. IGA Fresh distributes 

fresh produce from eight major facilities and meat 

from its ‘state of the art’ centre in Western Australia.

Campbells Wholesale

Campbells Wholesale is a multi-format distributor 

of grocery, general merchandise, confectionery, 

foodservice and liquor products. It services small 

business customers and retailers across Australia, 

leveraging its ability to offer a supply solution to 

nationally based customers. 

Our Customers
Our success is measured by the success of our 
customers – the independent retailers. For the most 
part, these are business owners operating stores in 
their local neighbourhoods – the face of the business 
and part of the community. We support our customers 
by providing a quality offering of products and 
services, including our own private labelled products, 
at competitive prices, allowing them to compete and 
grow their own businesses.

Our People
Our people are the bedrock of our organisation. 
Crucial to our ability to support our customers is the 
continuous development and support of our internal 
human resources. Our staff are supported through 
talent management, leadership development, 
employee engagement and workplace relations.

The cover and text sections of this report are printed on Mega Recycled Silk A2+, an 

The back section of this report is printed on Grange Laser which is PEFC certifi ed. 

environmentally considered sheet consisting of 50% post consumer recycled waste 

With ISO 14001 EMS accreditation, this wood free sheet is also made elemental 

and 50% FSC certifi ed fi bre. Mega Recycled is manufactured at the mill, which has its 

chlorine free.

own waste water treatment plant and are ISO 14001 EMS approved. Mega Recycled 

is made elemental chlorine free.

D E S I G N E D   A N D   P R O D U C E D   B Y   D E S I G N A T E   I N V E S T O R

CORPORATE INFORMATION

ABN 32 112 073 480

DIRECTORS

Peter Barnes (Chairman)

Andrew Reitzer (CEO)

Fiona Balfour

Michael Butler

Neil Hamilton

Edwin Jankelowitz

Richard Longes

V Dudley Rubin

COMPANY SECRETARY

Greg Watson

REGISTERED OFFICE

50 Waterloo Road

Macquarie Park NSW 2113

Telephone: 61 2 9751 8200

SHARE REGISTER

Boardroom Pty Limited

GPO Box 3993

Sydney NSW 2001

Telephone: 61 2 9290 9600

Facsimile: 61 2 9279 0664

AUDITOR

Ernst & Young

INTERNET ADDRESS

www.metcash.com

Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

IGA DISTRIBUTION HEAD OFFICE

MITRE 10 HEAD OFFICE

CAMPBELLS WHOLESALE HEAD OFFICE

Ph: 61 2 9741 3000

Fax: 61 2 9751 8298

4 Newington Road

Silverwater NSW 2128

Postal Address

PO Box 6226

Ph: 61 3 9703 4200

Fax: 61 3 9703 4222

12 Dansu Court

Hallam VIC 3803

Postal Address

Locked Bag 10

NATIONAL OFFICE

Ph: 61 2 9751 8200

Fax: 61 2 9741 3027

50 Waterloo Road

Macquarie Park NSW 2113

Postal Address

PO Box 6226

Ph: 61 2 9751 8200

Fax: 61 2 9741 3055

50 Waterloo Road

Macquarie Park NSW 2113

Postal Address

PO Box 6226

HEAD OFFICE

Ph: 61 2 9741 3000

Fax: 61 2 9741 3009

4 Newington Road

Silverwater NSW 2128

Postal Address

PO Box 6226

Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

Doveton VIC 3177

AUSTRALIAN LIQUOR MARKETERS 

Contents About Metcash 

Chairman & CEO’s Report 

Financial Review 

Five Year Review

Review of Operations

IGA Distribution

Australian Liquor Marketers

Campbells Wholesale

Mitre 10

Corporate Social Responsibility

Executive Team

Board of Directors

Corporate Governance Statement

Additional Financial Information

Directors’ Report

Financial Statements

Notes to the Financial Statements

Directors’ Declaration

Auditor’s Independence Declaration

Independent Auditor’s Report

2

4

6

9

10

12

16

18

20

22

28

30

32

40

42

56

60

96

97

98

Annual general meeting

01.09.2011 
Ballroom 1 Four Seasons Hotel 
2.30pm 
199 George Street, Sydney, NSW

ASX Additional Information

100

2

A B O U T   M E T C A S H

About 
Metcash

Metcash’s mission is to be the 
‘champion of the independent retailer’. 
Metcash champions the interests 
of the independent grocery, liquor 
and hardware sectors through the 
leadership of our high calibre staff, 
partnership with our independent 
retailer network and our pioneering 
approach to warehousing and 
distribution logistics.

Our network of independent retailers 
provides us with the scale necessary 
to create competitive buying power. 
Our marketing and brand building 
capabilities provide a platform for 
independent retailers to operate under 
unified and distinct retail store brands. 
Our merchandising ability, distribution 
logistics and warehousing capabilities 
ensure that we allow our independent 
retail customers to meet the needs of 
their consumers.

Metcash Limited (Metcash) is 
Australia’s leading wholesale 
distribution and marketing company 
specialising in grocery, fresh produce, 
liquor, other fast moving consumer 
goods, and hardware. 

Metcash has four divisions, often 
referred to as its business pillars, each 
operating in a distinct wholesaling 
industry segment:

 ›

IGA Distribution; 

 › Australian Liquor Marketers;

 › Campbells Wholesale; and 

 › Mitre 10.

With the exception of Mitre 10, which 
is 50.1% owned, the business pillars 
are wholly owned by Metcash.

Through Australian Liquor 
Marketers, Metcash also operates 
in New Zealand.

Predominantly, Metcash’s customers 
are independently owned grocery 
and liquor stores. After acquiring a 
majority interest in the Mitre 10 Group 
in March 2010, Metcash’s customer 
range has been broadened to include 
independent hardware stores.

Our Values 
Our core values represent who we are 
and underpin how we do business. 
These values are at the forefront as 
we interact with each other and our 
business partners. We also measure 
how well we live the values in our 
performance management processes.

Our Priorities
 › Ensuring our employees are 
empowered and committed 
to organisation goals through 
improved development programs 
and communication channels.

 › Providing safe work environments 
for all employees, supported by 
relevant training and working with 
our employees to help maintain 
good work- life balance.

 › Working to achieve consistently 

high service levels for our 
customers as we recognise that 
our success is critically dependent 
on the success of our independent 
retailer network.

 › Working in partnership with our 
stakeholder network to ensure 
that we meet our shared and 
individual goals.

› chaMpioning the custoMer 
› our stakeholders are entitled to added Value 
› responsibility & personal accountability 
› eMpowering our people & supporting our coMMunities 

Values are 
nothing  
without  
integrity

CORE VALUES

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1

3

Campbells Wholesale Mitre 10

Mitre 10 is Australia’s 
largest independent home 
improvement and hardware 
wholesaler with an iconic 
independent retail network of 
420 Mitre 10 and True Value 
Hardware stores nationally.

Mitre 10 operates four 
warehouses across Australia.

Campbells Wholesale is a  
multi-format distributor of 
grocery, confectionery, tobacco, 
liquor, soft drinks, foodservice 
and general merchandising 
products.

Campbells Wholesale has  
three divisions tailored to  
specific customer segments: 

 ›

traditional convenience; 

 › modern petrol and 
convenience; and 

 ›

foodservice. 

The business operates using 
a national network of over 
30 branches.

coMpany pillars

IGA Distribution

Australian Liquor 
Marketers

IGA Distribution (IGA›D) is 
Australia’s largest grocery 
wholesale distribution and 
marketing company supplying 
grocery products (dry, chilled, 
frozen and fresh) and general 
merchandise to independent 
businesses nationally.

IGA›D operates six major 
distribution centres and eight 
dedicated fresh produce 
warehouses across Australia.

Australian Liquor Marketers 
(ALM) is a broad range liquor 
wholesaler supplying over 15,000 
hotels, liquor stores, restaurants 
and other licensed premises 
throughout Australia.

ALM’s wholly owned subsidiary 
Tasman Liquor Company 
operates in a similar market in 
New Zealand.

ALM operates 15 distribution 
centres in Australia and  
New Zealand.

CORE VALUES

4

C H A I R M A N   &   C E O ’ S   R E P O R T

ChAirmAn & Ceo’s
report

We are pleased to announce a 
full year dividend of 27 cents 
for this financial year. 

The 2011 financial year was a 
successful one for Metcash with 
the company posting its twelfth 
successive record profit. This result 
was achieved in the face of difficult 
operating circumstances. Deflation 
again made trading difficult. However, 
the company performed strongly. 

Despite the challenging retail 
environment, Metcash increased 
wholesale sales from core operations 
by 7.4% to $12.36 billion. Reported 
profit after tax rose 6.1% to $241 
million, while EBITA increased 9.2% to 
$438 million. As a result, Metcash has 
increased its underlying(1) earnings per 
share to 33.4 cents. The fully franked 
total dividend for the year of 27 cents 
represents a payout ratio of 81%.

The cost of doing business continued 
to be well controlled in each of the 
business divisions through supply 
chain improvements and further 
technological innovation. Our balance 
sheet remains strong and all required 
borrowing facilities are in place.

The solid result was achieved through 
the steady performance and resilience 
of our independent retailer customers. 
This has seen Metcash and our 
customers continuing to invest in 
strengthening their operations and, 
as a result, maintaining their grocery 
market share.

All divisions within the Group remain 
focussed on improving operational 
efficiency in the prevailing deflationary 
environment and we continued our 
substantial investment in modernising 
the independent sector’s support 
structures and supply chain. 
Construction of the mega distribution 
centre in New South Wales is well 
ahead of schedule; this heralds 
an exciting future for independent 

retailers in New South Wales and 
provides a sound basis for long term 
sustainable growth.

Championing the independent retailer 
remains the core of our business 
model. As a wholesale distribution 
and marketing company, we have 
continued to provide independent 
retailers with the means to compete 
effectively. Our buying power with 
suppliers, world-class logistics and 
extensive merchandising, marketing 
and operational support sets us 
apart from the competition and 
allows our independent retailers 
to compete effectively. 

Our extensive distribution network was 
further strengthened this year giving 
our ‘virtual’ chain of independent 
retailers all the benefits of a major 
retail chain, without losing the ability 
to act and execute locally. The 
independent retailers are business 
owners operating stores in their local 
neighbourhoods. They are the face 
of the business and are very much 
part of the community engaging with 
consumers and employees on a daily 
basis. This approach continues to be 
an important point of differentiation 
and one we particularly focussed on 
this year; it is intrinsic to the success 
of the Metcash business model.

Our model depends on a close 
working relationship between the 
independent retailers and Metcash 
and, as such, each works together 
to ensure each store, and therefore 
the network, is strong. With our 
independent retailer network, we 
invested in developing 65 new stores 
with a total area of 56,925 square 
metres. Of these, 56 joined our 
flagship IGA brand. Out of a total 
of 26 conversions, 17 independent 

retailers converted from other store 
brands to the IGA brand. The high 
number of conversions underlines the 
appeal of Metcash’s premier banner 
and the strength of its marketing 
and merchandising programs. In 
addition, there were 20 extensions to 
existing stores and 41 refurbishments 
completed in conjunction with 
store owners.

The Australian liquor market had a 
difficult year with a continued decline 
in the consumption of packaged liquor 
and the impact of severe weather 
conditions in many of our key markets. 
Despite these conditions, ALM 
achieved sales growth on a ‘like for 
like’(1) basis of 2.7% and ‘like for like’(1) 
EBITA growth of 20.4%. 

Campbells Wholesale, our multi-
format distributor of grocery, 
general merchandise, confectionery, 
foodservice and liquor product 
wholesaler, had a 4.7% sales increase 
on a ‘like for like’(1) basis and EBITA 
uplift of 10%. Campbells Wholesale 
continues to evolve its offer of 
specialised supply solutions that 
saw the roll-out of a new in-store 
convenience concept.

Mitre 10 contributed strongly in its 
first full year of operations with sales 
of $797.6 million and EBITA of $20.7 
million. The turnaround initiatives 
introduced after acquisition of the 
business in March 2010 are proving 
effective and Mitre 10 is attracting new 
retailers to the brand.

Metcash continued to support the 
success of independent retailers 
through ongoing investment in supply 
chain modernisation. The company 
has invested significantly in recent 
years to streamline processes through 
improved technology. This year, 

(1) Refer to Additional Financial Information on page 40.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1

5

retailers benefited greatly from the 
mini-loader – an automated storage 
and retrieval system that incorporates 
a robotic crane picking system.

Another example of the way we are 
innovating to assist the independent 
retailers was the acquisition in June 
2011 of Scanning Systems Australia, 
an advanced back office and point of 
sale system provider. This acquisition 
of improved in-store technology 
capabilities will enable us to better 
support our independent retailers to 
plan and deliver innovative operational 
and customer service improvements.

Corporate responsibility to the 
communities we serve is a prime 
focus for Metcash. Not only does 
our retail strategy require that we 
actively encourage our suppliers to 
commit to using local ingredients 
in our IGA Signature brands, but 
also that two cents from every IGA 
Signature product sold is donated to 
the local IGA Community Chest. We 
are very proud of this initiative. The 
IGA Community Chest and associated 
programs raised in excess of 
$55 million in the last 9 years. All funds 
raised have been donated to local 
community groups and not-for-profit 
organisations.

We would again like to thank all our 
shareholders for your continued 
support. The future continues to look 
bright for your company and we are 
confident that there are many new 
and exciting initiatives just around the 
corner. We would also like to thank 
our fellow Directors, employees, 
customers and suppliers for their 
hard work and support over the last 
12 months.

THANK 
YOU

We would again like to thank all 
our shareholders for your continued 
support. The future continues to look 
bright for your company and we 
are confident that there are many 
new and exciting initiatives just 
around the corner. 

Andrew Reitzer  
(CEO Metcash Group of Companies)

Andrew Reitzer (CEO Metcash Group of Companies)
Peter Barnes (Chairman)

Peter Barnes 
(Chairman)

12TH SUCCESSiVE

RECORd  

pROfiT

15000

12000

9000

6000

3000

0

15000

12000

9000

6000

3000

0

500

400

300

200

100

0

250

200

150

100

50

0

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

EBITA

15000

12000

9000

15000

6000

12000

3000

9000

0

6000

3000

0

15000

12000

9000

15000

6000

12000

3000

9000

0

6000

3000

0

500

400

300

500

200

1500

400

100

1200

300

0

900

200

600

100

300

0

0

TOTAL REVENUE

TOTAL SALES REVENUE

15000

12000

9000

6000

3000

0

6

20

WHOLESALE SALES

F I N A N C I A L   R E V I E W 

MARKET SHARE %

15

FinAnCiAl 
reView

10
15000

12000
5

9000
0

6000

TOTAL REVENUE

9000

15000
6000

TOTAL SALES REVENUE

15

10

.

5
3
6

.

9
2
6

.

8
2
2

.

1
6
2

5

.

5
9
2

.

0
2
3

09

10

11

07

08

09

10

11

0

15000

12000

9000

6000

3000

0

uPby 
4.4%

(cents)
UNDErlyING(1) 
EarNINGS  
UNDERLYING EARNINGS PER SHARE
pEr SharE
TOTAL SALES REVENUE
33.4
OPERATING CASH FLOW

20

MARKET SHARE %

uPby 
3.8%

DIVIDENDS PER SHARE

(cents)
DIvIDENDS  
MARKET SHARE %
pEr SharE
27

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

.

0
7
1

10

.

0
1
2

.

0
4
2

.

0
6
2

0

07

08

09

10

11

COST OF DOING BUSINESS

hiGh 
payout

(%)
COST OF DOING BUSINESS
DIvIDEND  
DIVIDEND PAYOUT RATIO
payOUT raTIO
80.9

300

250

200

150

100

downby 
16.0bPs

(%)
COST OF DOING  
COST OF DOING BUSINESS
BUSINESS/ 
WHOLESALE SALES
GrOSS prOFIT
62.7

15000

12000

37

300

250

200

0
150

100

50

0

12000
3000

.

9
5
6

9000
0

08

.

9
6
6

07

6000

3000

0

uPby  
9.2%
EBITA

15

20

10
20

5
15

0
10

5

.

1
3
3
3

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

.

7
0
1
3

07

50

40
80
30
70
20
60
10
50
0
40

30

20

10

.

4
7
9
1

0

.

6
8
5
1

90

72

54

36

18

0

($m)
EBITa
438

.

3
1
7
3

.

2
1
0
4

0
08

09

10

11

80

uPby  
6.1%
PROFIT AFTER TAX

60

70

($m)
prOFIT  
aFTEr Tax
241.4

TOTAL SALES REVENUE

MARKET SHARE %

COST OF DOING BUSINESS

OPERATING CASH FLOW

.

5
2
0
2

.

6
7
2
2

.

0
1
7

50

.

6
0
8

.

2
1
8

.

2
1
8

07

08

09

10

11

0

07

08

09

10

11

(1) Refer to Additional Financial Information on page 40.

EARNINGS PER SHARE

DIVIDENDS PER SHARE

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

3000

0

uPby 
7.4%

TOTAL REVENUE

($m)
TOTal rEvENUE
12,461.6

PROFIT AFTER TAX

TOTAL REVENUE

.

9
5
6
7
9

,

.

4
2
0
2
0
1

,

.

5
7
6
0
1
1

,

.

1
8
0
6
1
1

,

07

08

09

10

11

WHOLESALE SALES
uPby 
7.4%
EARNINGS PER SHARE

WHOLESALE SALES

($m)
WhOlESalE  
SalES
12,364

.

1
1
5
4
9

.

0
5
4
0
0
1

,

.

0
4
7
9
0
1

,

.

4
7
1
5
1
1

,

07

08

09

10

11

EBITA

uPby 
4.7%
EBITA

NET ASSETS

($m)
NET aSSETS
1,442.8

.

2
0
8
1
1

,

.

7
9
3
2
1

,

.

4
9
7
2
1

,

.

6
7
7
3
1

,

07

08

09

10

11

80

70
15000
60
12000
50

40
9000
30
6000
20

10
3000
0

0

500

400

300

200

100

0

250

200

150

100

50

0

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1

7

TOTAL
REVENUE
Up BY
7.4% TO

12,462
MiLLiON
DOLLARs

8

F I N A N C I A L   R E V I E W  C O N T I N U E D

THE gROUp HAS 
pAiD OUT

81% hiGh  

UNdERLYiNg(1) 
EARNiNgS

dividend 
PAyout  
rAtio

capital position. Net working capital 
increased by $178 million over the 
prior period, driven largely by the 
inventory levels, some what offset by 
increases in trade payables and also 
impacted by reductions in employee 
entitlements due to payments of long 
and short term incentives for 2010. 
Trade receivables showed an overall 
reduction of two days outstanding, 
due to good collection results and 
the continued growth in the American 
Express payment facility used by 
our customers.

The Group has drawn down an 
additional $136 million in net debt 
during the period, primarily due to 
the working capital increases noted 
above, but also to fund ongoing 
investment in the supply chain and to 
further strengthen the retailer network.

Group continues to maintain a strong 
balance sheet, adequate funding 
capacity and is well placed for future 
growth and expansion.

Cash Flow
Cash flow generation from operations 
continued to be strong at $303 million 
for the year. However, the temporary 
working capital requirements at 
balance date, as noted above, 
reduced the net cash flows for the 
period to $142.5 million.

Metcash maintains its focus on 
reinvestment and the modernising 
of the independents’ support 
structures and supply chain, with a 
total of $82.3 million being invested 
in capital expenditure, business 
acquisition and loans to customers 
for expansion activities.

The Group has maintained its high 
dividend payout ratio of recent years 
by once again paying out in excess 
of 80% of underlying(1) earnings per 
share. Total dividend payments for the 
year amounted to $199.4 million.

The 2011 financial year of the Group 
has seen a continuation of the difficult 
economic conditions experienced in 
the post-GFC economy. The trading 
environment has been characterised 
by ongoing deflationary impacts in the 
sector, coupled with a more cautious 
and value driven consumer and a 
season of summer weather conditions 
across the country not witnessed for 
over 30 years. 

In spite of these conditions, the Group 
has continued to record positive sales 
growth, with total sales growing by 
7.4%. ‘Like for like’(1) sales represented 
a 5.2% increase on the prior year. This 
clearly demonstrates the resilience of 
both the Metcash business model and 
the independent retailers.

On 1 July 2010, the Group announced 
its plan to acquire the Franklins 
supermarket business in NSW from 
the South African based retailer Pick n 
Pay. In November 2010, the Australian 
Competition & Consumer Commission 
announced that it would oppose the 
Group’s planned acquisition and sought 
an injunction against the transaction 
proceeding. In conducting this action, 
and in its preliminary negotiations with 
Pick n Pay, the Group has incurred 
$6.9 million in costs in the current year. 
These costs have been disclosed as a 
non-recurring item in the current year’s 
income statement.

All divisions within the Group remain 
focussed on improving operational 
efficiency in the prevailing deflationary 
environment. The Group has further 
reduced its Cost of Doing Business 
as a percentage of Gross Profit 
by 16 basis points in the current 
year, despite substantial increases 
experienced in utility costs such 
as electricity. The Group continues 
to focus on making substantial 
investment in modernising the 
independent sector’s support 
structures and supply chain.

As a result of these factors, the Group 
was able to achieve its revised market 
guidance, reporting underlying(1) 
earnings per share of 33.4 cents, 
an increase of 4.4% on the prior 
year. A final dividend of 16 cents 
per share was declared bringing the 
total dividend declared for the 2011 
financial year to 27 cents per share 
fully franked.

Financial Position
The Easter trading period is one 
of substantial business activity for 
the Group. The timing of the Easter 
trading period in late April 2011 
coincided with the Group’s balance 
date. This had the effect of requiring 
abnormally large inventory levels to be 
held for post Easter trading, thereby 
impacting on the overall working 

(1) Refer to Additional Financial Information on page 40.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1

9

Five yeAr 
reView 11

10

09

08

Restated
07

Financial Performance
Sales ($m)

Earnings before interest and taxation ($m)

Interest, net ($m)

Operating profit before tax ($m)

Profit after tax ($m)

Financial Position
Metcash shareholder equity ($m)

Net tangible assets per share (cents)

Gearing (debt/debt+equity) (%)

Share Statistics
Fully paid ordinary shares

12,364.0 

11,517.4 

10,981.7 

10,116.1 

 9,694.8 

 423.2 

 66.3 

 356.9 

 241.4

1,442.8 

 19.73 

 36.7 

 379.3 

 49.3 

 330.0 

 227.6

1,377.6 

 12.49 

 35.5 

 340.5

 49.8 

 290.7

 202.5

1,279.4 

 12.98 

 33.5 

 333.4 

 49.1 

 284.3 

 197.4

282.9 

57.2 

225.7 

158.6 

1,239.7 

 1,180.2 

 16.16 

 33.2 

8.65 

34.1 

768,853,644 

765,644,031 

764,888,363 

764,792,593 

 762,405,655 

Weighted average ordinary shares

767,676,470 

765,178,865 

764,843,880 

763,484,392 

 753,116,068 

Earnings per share (cents)

Underlying(1) earnings per share (cents)

Dividends declared per share (cents)

 31.5 

33.4

 27.0 

 29.7 

32.0

 26.0

 26.5

29.5

 24.0

 25.9

26.1

 21.0

21.1 

22.8

17.0 

Other Statistics
Number of employees  
(full-time equivalents)

 5,638 

 5,773 

 5,358 

 5,056 

5,855 

10

R E V I E W   O F   O P E R A T I O N S

review oF 
operations

IGA Distribution

IGA Fresh

Australian Liquor Marketers

Major Activities
 › Marketing and distribution specialists supplying 
IGA branded, FoodWorks and non-branded 
independent grocery stores in New South 
Wales, the Australian Capital Territory, 
Victoria, Queensland, South Australia and 
Western Australia.

 › Operates out of six major distribution centres 

and eight dedicated fresh produce warehouses 
across Australia.

 › Provides expertise tailored to independent 
retailers’ requirements, with a range of 
marketing, merchandising, buying, operational 
and distribution services.

Significant Achievements
 › Wholesale Sales up 6.0% to $7.6 billion.

 › EBITA up 4.4% to $361.8 million.

 ›

‘How the locals like it’ – a cultural shift to focus 
on local consumer needs.

 › Success of ‘Locked Down Low Prices’ program 
which continues to provide consumer savings 
and to keep independents competitive.

Future Direction
 › Ensuring our promotional offer continues to 
provide value to our retailers’ customers.

 › Building IGA brand equity and ensuring 

three tier brand clarity.

 › Growing the retail area through new stores, 

conversions and extensions.

 › Buy-back and the resale of underperforming 
independent stores to proven IGA retailers.

 ›

Investment in a new mega distribution centre 
in New South Wales to improve efficiency and 
reduce the cost of doing business at both 
wholesale and retail levels.

(1) Refer to Additional Financial Information on page 40.

Major Activities
 ›

Fresh food innovation and product 
development.

 › Develop strategic supplier partnerships through 
business plan development, catalogue activity, 
promotional programs and advertising panels.

 › Provide competitive fresh food, retail and 
consumer solutions for all independent 
channels.

 ›

Training and retail operational support for 
independent retailers.

Significant Achievements
 ›

Invested in warehouse modernisation – 
Cairns Fresh warehouse and Canning Vale, 
WA facilities completed.

 › Recovery from Queensland floods and cyclone.

 › Continued rapid sales growth.

 › Produce warehouses now fully integrated into 

Metcash systems.

Future Direction
 ›

Innovative, differentiated service for both 
individual and multi-store owners.

 › Drive profitable sales through improved 

produce platform.

Major Activities
 › Broad range liquor wholesaler supplying over 
15,000 hotels, liquor stores, restaurants and 
other licensed premises throughout Australia 
and in New Zealand. 

 › Australia’s biggest liquor wholesaler, and 
through the independent liquor network 
operating under Independent Brands Australia, 
is the second largest liquor retailer in Australia.

 › Operates out of 15 distribution centres 

throughout Australia and in New Zealand.

 › Provides a complete service allowing customers 
to receive all their liquor supplies in one delivery, 
on one invoice, in full, on time, every time, 
together with strong marketing support and 
a wide variety of retail services.

 ›

Includes a specialist liquor supply and support 
division to the ‘on-premise’ sector including 
bars, restaurants and hotels in both Australia 
and New Zealand.

Significant Achievements
 ›

‘Like for like’(1) sales growth up 2.7% and 
‘like for like’(1) EBITA growth up 20.4%.

 ›

Independents Brands Australia (IBA) retail 
outlets grew sales with IGA Liquor performing 
strongly.

 › Establish a ‘retail ready’ meat program on 

 › Win-back strategy for the ‘on-premise’ market 

the east coast.

continuing to gain momentum.

Future Direction
 › Continue to grow IBA and Liquor Alliance store 

numbers.

 ›

Improve store standards and refurbish stores. 

 › Beer volume growth – one stop supply to the 

Independent channel.

 › Make further progress to win back the  

‘on-premise’ market.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 11

Campbells Wholesale

Mitre 10

Major Activities
 › Primarily focused on the convenience, route 

Future Direction
 › Continuing to provide the total supply chain 

solution to the modern petrol and convenience 
channel throughout metropolitan and  
regional centres.

 ›

Increase the Lucky 7 branded stores to 450 
by the end of FY 2012.

 › Continued growth in confectionery markets.

 › Continuing to expand the foodservice 

operations of the business.

 ›

Format innovation – Lucky 7 Ezy format 
trial underway.

and hospitality channels of trade. 

 › Services customers who require a total supply 
solution across a broad range of fast moving 
consumer goods.

 › Campbells Wholesale has national service  

and distribution through 31 branches servicing 
over 80,000 small businesses and retailers 
across all states and territories, stocking in 
excess of 20,000 product lines including 
grocery, confectionery, tobacco, liquor,  
soft drinks, foodservice and general 
merchandising products.

 › C-Store Distribution provides a total supply 

solution to the modern petrol and  
convenience sector.

 ›

Two FoodLink Foodservice businesses in 
Western Australia and Queensland providing 
the leading distribution solution to the 
foodservice industry.

Significant Achievements
 ›

‘Like for like’(1) sales up 4.7% to $1.71 billion.

 › EBITA up 10.3% to $31.8 million.

 › Successfully completed Project Streamline, 
rationalising its network of branches while 
maintaining high customer retention rates.

 › Supply to 130 Mobil sites acquired by 7-Eleven.

Major Activities
 ›

Independent home improvement and hardware 
wholesaler with an independent retail network 
of 420 Mitre 10 and True Value Hardware 
stores nationally.

 › Operates out of four warehouses across 

Australia.

 › Provides expertise tailored to independent 
retailers’ requirements, with a range of 
marketing, merchandising, buying, operational 
and distribution services.

Significant Achievements
 › Sales of $797.6 million.

 › EBITA of $20.7 million.

 › Management continued to work on executing 
the strategic plan developed early in the 
initial phase post-acquisition with the 
following results:

- Stabilised store network;

-  Extended product ranges to meet customer  

needs;

-  Focused on brand essence of being 

‘Mighty Helpful’;

-  Improved merchandise and marketing  

programs; and

- Commenced supply chain modernisation.

Future Direction
 › Grow the store network.

 › Complete brand harmonisation.

 ›

Improve store standards and execution at  
store level.

 › Continue to modernise the supply chain.

 › Continue to improve the merchandise strategies 

and range.

 › Continue to grow the Mitre 10 brand.

12

I G A   D I S T R I B U T I O N

iGA 
distribution

Doing business ‘How the 
locals like it’ has been 
instrumental in delivering 
sales growth despite 
the tough operating 
conditions.

IGA Distribution (IGA>D) performed 
strongly in the past year despite 
the challenging prevailing 
conditions. Sales rose by 6% and 
EBITA grew 4.4% in the face of 
persistent deflation across many 
grocery product categories and 
an increasingly value-oriented 
consumer. This result was 
underpinned by 4.5% comparative 
store sales growth.

IGA>D continued work to improve 
different facets of its operations 
to ensure its independent retailer 
customers receive quality products 
and services. Continued investment 
in improving the supply chain and 
strategies to restrict costs helped 
achieve the strong result. 

How the Locals Like It
IGA>D and its independent retailers 
are committed to doing business 
‘How the locals like it’. Launched in 
July 2010, the ‘How the locals like it’ 
tagline has grown into the prevailing 
IGA culture. ‘How the locals 
like it’ defines how independent 
retail stores operate and IGA>D 
works with its retailers to attain 
differentiated customer category 
management in each IGA store 
across Australia. Born out of our 
successful ‘Local Heroes’ campaign, 
‘How the locals like it’ empowers 
IGA>D and IGA stores to deliver 
product ranges that are tailored to 
consumers within their community. 
Doing business ‘How the locals like 

it’ has been instrumental in delivering 
sales growth despite the tough 
operating conditions.

Locked Down Low Prices
Our ‘Locked Down Low Prices’ 
program has become entrenched 
in our national sales programs. We 
continue to maintain key product lines 
under the ‘Locked Down Low Prices’ 
range to meet the needs of value-
conscious consumers. ‘Locked Down 
Low Prices’ signifies our commitment 
and reward to loyal consumers and 
assures them that we will continue to 
drive prices down and make shopping 
better value in our IGA stores.

Retail Business 
Development
The 2011 financial year again 
generated strong new independent 
store growth with 65 new stores 
adding 56,925 square metres to the 
independent store network. This 
represented an increase of 12 stores 
and nearly 20,000 square metres on 
the prior year. A further 26 stores, 
representing 17,115 square metres, 
were converted to branded stores 
from non-IGA related brands. Of 
these, 17 stores joined the IGA brand. 
The activity resulted in a total new 
stores count for the year of 91 sites. A 
further 61 sites were refurbished and /
or extended during the year.

IGA>D also instigated a store 
‘buy-back’ and ‘re-sale’ program to 
accelerate the rate of refurbishment 
and store improvement across the 
network. This program encourages 
the transfer of store ownership to 
a new IGA retailer and promotes 
re-investment in stores to modernise 
the retail offer. During the year, 
15 stores were transferred to new 
retailers and these stores showed 
post redevelopment uplift in retail and 
warehouse sales of more than 20%. 
Currently 80 sites are targeted across 
the country.

Project Lion
Project Lion (Leadership, Innovation, 
Ownership and Negotiation) has 
continued to yield results for the 
business. Project Lion was established 
in early 2008 to facilitate goal-sharing 
and communication between IGA>D 
and IGA independent retailers.

Retail analytics assists both IGA 
independent retailers and IGA>D to 
identify opportunities to generate 
sales growth. IGA>D’s retail analytics 
process identified ranging gaps at 
retail level. Rectifying these gaps 
will increase retail turnover for our 
customers and in turn improve 
IGA>D sales.

The cost of doing business (CODB) 
program is in its second year and 
independent retailers continue to 
identify and implement strategies to 
reduce their CODB. The focus for 
the coming year is to increase the 
number of CODB retailer focus groups 
who work together to identify cost 
reduction opportunities for individual 
retailers or the collective.

Year two of the Lion rebate program, 
designed to reward retailer behaviour 
that protects and improves the IGA 
network, has seen an increase in 
participation by 39% on the prior year. 
The program is rewarding retailers 
for improved retail standards and 
compliance. These improvements 
result in increased retail sales for the 
IGA retailer and improved wholesale 
volume for IGA>D.

Retail Initiatives
As customers are increasingly 
reliant on web-enabled and digital 
technology, IGA>D continues to 
develop IGA’s online presence and 
digital capabilities. IGA customers 
can now access store locations, 
catalogues and recipes and create 
shopping lists using iPhone and iPad 
applications. This heralds an exciting 
phase for the IGA family and its 
customers. 

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 13

TOTal SalES

uPby 
6.0%

($m)
TOTal SalES
7,559.9

.

8
1
8
6
6

,

.

9
9
2
1
7

,

.

2
4
2
8
5

,

.

0
6
6
0
6

,

07

08

09

10

11

($m)
EBITa
361.8

.

3
7
4
2

.

1
5
7
2

.

5
5
1
3

.

6
6
4
3

07

08

09

10

11

FOOD DISTRIBUTION — TOTAL SALES
FOOD DISTRIBUTION — TOTAL SALES

8000

8000

0

0

FOOD DISTRIBUTION — REPORTED RESULT
FOOD DISTRIBUTION — REPORTED RESULT

400

350
400
300
350
250
300
200
250
150
200
100
150
50
100
0
50

65NEw 

0

STORES A D D I N G  56,925  s qm   

T O ThE I N D EpE N D E N T S T O R E
N E T W O Rk

 
14

I G A   D I S T R I B U T I O N  C O N T I N U E D

iGAFresh

In its third year of operation, IGA 
Fresh has continued to integrate and 
develop its service across all areas 
of fresh food to better support the 
independent retailers’ local fresh 
food offer. Key successes include 
the full integration of the produce 
warehouses’ IT systems, integration 
of the retail specialist team and 
further category innovation in the 
meat, delicatessen and bakery 
product ranges. 

Full integration of the 
produce warehouses’ IT 
systems, integration of 
the retail specialist team 
and further category 
innovation in the meat, 
delicatessen and bakery 
product ranges.

Meat
Meat operations had an excellent year, 
with strong sales growth and a range 
of improvements available to our retail 
customers. A key focus has been the 
development of a combined meat 
processing facility in Western Australia 
– merging our two existing facilities 
and providing a full service solution 
to IGA retailers using cutting edge 
production technology. The new meat 
processing facility was commissioned 
post year end. The private label meat 
range provides increased profitability 
to retailers with 182 products now 
available.

Delicatessen
Delicatessen sales continue to 
increase strongly year on year, with 
a great deal of product innovation 
through the year. A number of 
suppliers have moved from supplying 
direct to store to supplying via the 
IGA>D warehouse due to efficiencies 
offered by Metcash in consolidating 
deliveries to independent stores. This 
trend looks set to continue in 2012. 
The ‘deli’ team has also employed 
account specialists to provide 
specialised category management 
services to retailers.

Produce
This was a challenging year with 
the continuation of a long-term 
deflationary cycle in the first half and 
a second half defined by floods that 
submerged the Rocklea produce 
warehouse and Cyclone Yasi 
decimating banana crops. These 
events led to a significant change in 
purchasing behaviour at store level 
across Australia with a short term 
price impact.

IGA Fresh in Queensland was able 
to respond rapidly to the flooding at 
Rocklea with an immediate move 
to a satellite warehouse resulting in 
almost no supply stoppages. Within 
four days, a replacement facility was 
operating and able to supply the total 
Queensland customer base. This rapid 
response mirrored the spectacular 
efforts of our retailers to support 
their communities, and highlighted 
to those retailers the support a 
Metcash-backed produce wholesaler 
can provide.

The integration of the produce 
warehouses into Metcash systems is 
now complete, with benefits including 
national buying opportunities and 
improved management reporting 
available to each site. With over 
300 products available under our 
private label brand and a strong 
promotional program in place, retailers 
are well positioned to provide their 
consumers with quality products at 
competitive prices.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 15

iGA Fresh

TEAmS ARE 
COmmiTTEd

T O D E L IvE R I N G A N    
improved   
C O MpE T I T IvE O F F E R I N G.

IGA>D and IGA Fresh 
management is committed 
to championing the 
independent retailers 
it serves.

What the Future Holds
IGA>D and IGA Fresh management 
is committed to championing the 
independent retailers it serves. While 
we expect the business environment 
to remain challenging, our core 
strengths and competencies – our 
people, logistics, commercial strength 
and business model – remain the 
backbone of our operations. These 
have and will continue to enable us to 
take on opportunities for value growth. 

We recognise the contribution of 
our people and our commitment 
to staff is unwavering. We continue 
to up-skill our people at all levels of 
the organisation through in-house 
development and training. Where 
necessary, we use external specialists 
to provide the necessary skills and 
competencies. This continuous 
improvement process helps ensure 
we are well positioned to meet 
the challenges of the changing 
operating environment.

Logistical excellence continues to 
be a core business strength and 
underpins how we operate. Our 
national distribution centre (NDC) for 
‘slow moving’ ranges located at our 
Laverton distribution centre in Victoria, 
was developed to improve our ranging 
options. A significant investment, the 
NDC is meeting our operational goals, 
enabling an improved width of range 
to our customers across Australia.

Our new meat processing facility 
in Western Australia will enable us 
to provide a full service solution to 
independent retailers. 

IGA>D will continue to invest in 
strategies that protect independent 
retailers and ensure their growth. 
These initiatives include direct 
investments in developing ‘greenfield’ 
sites, facilitating the store ‘buy-back’ 
and ‘re-sale’ program and maintaining 
our institutional advertising spend to 
further build the IGA brand. 

16

A U S T R A L I A N   L I Q U O R   M A R K E T E R S

AustrAliAn 
liquor 
Marketers

Our focus on strong 
marketing, improving 
retail standards and 
continually improving 
support from our 
suppliers resulted in 
another strong year for 
IBA and ALM.

The 2011 financial year was another 
difficult trading period for the 
Australian liquor market. According 
to latest available market statistics, 
packaged liquor sales volumes 
continued to decline and this, coupled 
with severe weather conditions 
experienced in many of our key 
markets, impacted on overall growth. 
That said, by staying true to the 
Independent Brands Australia (IBA) 
retail model, sales in ALM showed 
continued growth despite this overall 
market decline. 

ALM achieved sales growth on a 
‘like for like’(1) basis of 2.7% and 
‘like for like’(1) EBITA growth of 
20.4%. Sales through our key retail 
brands continued to outperform the 
overall market. Our focus on strong 
marketing, improving retail standards 

and support from our suppliers 
resulted in another strong year for IBA 
and ALM. 

Tasman Liquor, our New Zealand 
business, performed solidly during 
the year in what was a difficult 
environment and, following our 
restructure in 2010, the business 
performed above expectations.

Our strategy to win back sales 
to our ‘on-premise’ customers is 
showing strong growth against other 
competitors and this strategy will 
continue to be expanded during the 
first half of next financial year.

Independent Brands Australia 
(IBA)
IBA continued to lead the way for 
the independent banner groups in 
Australia. Management continued its 
strategy of working to lift the retail 
standards of the entire IBA network. 
This strategy resulted in a great 
improvement in the quality of stores 
over the last year. 

ALM has a long history of supporting 
independent liquor retailers in Australia 
and with the continued success of 
IBA and our strong relationship with 
our external customer groups we 
see independent retailers continuing 
to perform strongly in what is likely 
to continue to be a very difficult 
trading environment.

(1) Refer to Additional Financial Information on page 40.

Investment in Infrastructure to 
Support independent Retailers
During the year, ALM continued its 
investment in infrastructure to support 
independent liquor retailers in Australia 
with the opening of a purpose-built 
distribution centre in Perth, Western 
Australia. The second half of next 
year will see us move into the new 
distribution facility in Huntingwood, 
New South Wales reinforcing our 
commitment to invest in independent 
liquor retailers in Australia. We also 
continued the roll-out of a fit-for-
purpose warehouse management 
software solution with our Cairns 
warehouse going live pre-Christmas 
2010. Radio frequency receiving 
is now used across all our major 
Australian distribution centres and 
management is constantly seeking 
new initiatives to reduce our overall 
cost of doing business.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 17

LIQUOR DISTRIBUTION — TOTAL SALES
LIQUOR DISTRIBUTION — TOTAL SALES

3000

2500
3000
2000
2500
1500
2000
1000
1500
500
1000
0
500

0

LIQUOR DISTRIBUTION — REPORTED RESULT
LIQUOR DISTRIBUTION — REPORTED RESULT

40

35
40
30
35
25
30
20
25
15
20
10
15
5
10
0
5

TOTal SalES 
‘lIKE FOr lIKE‘(1)

uPby 
2.7%

($m)
TOTal SalES
2,296.6

.

4
9
3
6
2

,

.

6
0
4
6
2

,

.

3
9
9
4
2

,

.

2
3
5
4
2

,

07

08

09

10

11

($m)
EBITa
30.1

.

4
8
2

.

2
1
3

.

8
3
3

.

1
6
3

07

08

09

10

11

0

inCreAsed
ALm 
LiKE fOR LiKE (1) 
SALES 

ShO W E D  CO N T I NuE D
GroWTH  D E SpI T E   ThE 
M A RkE T   D E C L I N E

$

 
18

C A M P B E L L ’ S   W H O L E S A L E

customer having multiple deliveries 
from different vendors. 

CSD continues to gain efficiencies 
through better logistics practices, 
while supply chain costs continue to 
be reduced through investment in 
logistics technology.

FoodLink is a specialist foodservice 
distributor in Perth (WA) and Brisbane 
(Qld). FoodLink supplies foodservice 
providers, mining sites, franchised 
quick service restaurants and the 
general ‘free trade’ (independent 
restaurants, takeaway operators, 
pubs and clubs) with all their catering 
needs. FoodLink prides itself on 
excellent service delivery to its diverse 
customer base. 

As the resource sector has improved, 
FoodLink’s growth improved and we 
anticipate good future growth.

‘Lucky 7’ Convenience 
Brand
Lucky 7 is an independent 
convenience store brand developed 
by Campbells Wholesale. Lucky 7 has 
360 branded sites across Australia 
generating over $380 million in retail 
sales annually.

Stores operating under the Lucky 7 
brand are independent stores, locally 
owned and operated. The Lucky 7 
banner provides smaller independents 
with a unique formatted offer including 
store refurbishments, signage, retail 
assistance, planograms and impulse 
promotions. Members joining this 
group are provided with the tools 
required to compete effectively in 
the convenience market. Significant 
investment has been made in the 
brand and membership is expected to 
increase to over 450 in the next year.

Recently, Lucky 7 also launched 
Lucky 7 Ezy, a concept designed 
to benefit customers who have the 
available foot traffic to expose a core 
range of convenience products to 
their consumers.

CAmPbells 
wholesale

Despite a challenging 
retail sales environment, 
especially in the 
convenience sector, 
Campbells is expected 
to continue to deliver 
profitable growth. 

Campbells Wholesale performed 
solidly, with sales increasing on a ‘like 
for like’(1) basis by 4.7% to $1.71 billion 
and EBITA increasing by 10.3 % to 
$31.8 million.

During the year, under Project 
Streamline, management created 
the Campbells Wholesale Division 
by combining the previously distinct 
traditional cash and carry business 
with the wholesale distribution 
business. This initiative was required to 
ensure that Campbells could provide 
a unique and flexible service to its 
small business and convenience store 
operators. The process was managed 
effectively resulting in significant cost 
savings to the business. Service 
from existing outlets helped achieve 
good customer retention from the 
rationalised branches.

Campbells Wholesale now operates 
three divisions, each tailored to meet 
the respective service requirements of 
its consumer markets.

Our Divisions
Campbells Wholesale (Campbells) is 
the main division of the business, with 
31 branches in major metropolitan and 
regional centres. Campbells operates 
a hybrid model combining cash and 
carry operations (self service) and a full 
pick, pack and delivery service. 

Campbells has a diverse customer 
base represented by traditional 
independent convenience store 
owners, quick service restaurants 
and takeaway outlets and other 
hospitality focussed customers. 
Campbells offers a wide range of 
products in grocery, confectionery, 
tobacco, liquor, foodservice and 
general merchandise as a total supply 
solution to its customers. A major 
competitive advantage is the ability to 
deliver flexible and frequent deliveries 
to meet its customers’ total range 
needs. The division continues to enjoy 
solid growth in confectionery and 
foodservice through its respective 
Sweetspot® and Catering Connection® 
strategies.

C-Store Distribution (CSD) 
consists of five branches in the major 
metropolitan cities. CSD specialises in 
servicing the organised convenience 
sector including modern petrol and 
convenience stores run by major 
petroleum companies in Australia. 

During the year, CSD benefitted from 
increased trade with 7-Eleven following 
7-Eleven’s acquisition of Mobil service 
stations. 7-Eleven is in the process 
of rebranding the Mobil sites. Once 
the conversions are completed, CSD 
anticipates revenue uplift in the region 
of $140 million per annum.

The organised convenience sector 
derives major benefit from using 
the efficient supply chain CSD 
provides, which is unmatched in 
the industry. CSD combines unit 
picking and full case picking with 
a commitment to 24 or 48 hour 
turnaround depending on customer 
need. CSD’s total supply solution 
means customers’ requirements are 
met in a single delivery, in full and 
on time. This solution eradicates 
the inefficiencies associated with a 

(1) Refer to Additional Financial Information on page 40.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 19

TOTal SalES 
‘lIKE FOr lIKE‘(1)

uPby 
4.7%

($m)
TOTal SalES
1,709.9

.

4
7
1
4
1

,

.

8
0
5
5
1

,

.

4
0
6
6
1

,

.

3
5
8
6
1

,

07

08

09

10

11

($m)
EBITa
31.8

.

8
8
2

09

10

11

CASH & CARRY DISTRIBUTION — TOTAL SALES
CASH & CARRY DISTRIBUTION — TOTAL SALES

2000

2000
1500

1500
1000

1000
500

500
0

0

CASH & CARRY DISTRIBUTION — REPORTED RESULT
CASH & CARRY DISTRIBUTION — REPORTED RESULT

35

30
35
25
30
20
25
15
20
10
15
5
10
0
5

.

0
3
3

.

.

0

08

07

9
8
2

6
0
3

$

10.3%

iNCREASE iN  
CAmpBELLS’
EBiTA

T O A T O T A L O F

$31.8  M I L L I O N

 
20

M I T R E   1 0

mitre10

Rebuilding the Mitre 10 
brand has also been a 
key plank of our strategy 
in the 2011 financial 
year. We have focussed 
on brand harmonisation 
to ensure consistency 
in branding as well as 
marketing to improve 
brand awareness.

Mitre 10 made a strong contribution 
in its first full 12 months as part of the 
Metcash group, with sales of $797.6 
million and EBITA of $20.7 million. 
Pleasingly, many of the initiatives in 
our two year turnaround strategy 
known as ‘Change the Game’ are now 
gaining traction.

Retain and Grow Store 
Network 
Following a number of years of store 
losses, the Mitre 10 independent store 
network has been stabilised and now 
consists of 420 stores. Mitre 10 is 
attracting new retailers to the brand 
with 15 new stores joining the brand in 
the past six months.

Brand Harmonisation and 
Brand Awareness
Rebuilding the Mitre 10 brand has 
also been a key plank of our strategy 
in the 2011 financial year. We have 
focussed on brand harmonisation 
to ensure consistency in branding 
as well as marketing to improve 
brand awareness.

Branding compliance increased 
significantly, with 50% of independent 
retail stores now ‘Blue & White’ 
compliant up from 20%. Commitments 
have been obtained from store owners 
for 80% of stores to be compliant by 
the end of 2012.

Marketing awareness around our 
‘Mighty Helpful’ brand essence is 
growing due to two key broadcast 
initiatives. Our new TV campaign 
features a local TV personality and 
home improvement expert as the 
face of Mitre 10. Additionally, Mitre 10 
is sponsoring a home improvement 
TV program which commenced in 
June 2011.

Supply Chain
Warehouse productivity for Mitre 10 
will continue to improve in line with 
existing standards in other areas of 
Metcash. The process of introducing 
engineered standards into the four 
distribution centres and refining the 
existing IT platform continues.

Work on a National Distribution 
Centre (NDC) for slow moving stock 
is nearing completion. The NDC 
will enable us to free up space and 
drive greater efficiencies in our state 
distribution centres.

Merchandising
We launched our new merchandise 
program during the 2011 financial 
year. An expanded product range 
of 3,000 stock keeping units was 
rolled out to meet retailer and end-
consumer needs. 

A ‘Locked Down Low Prices’ program 
was introduced in March 2011 and 
reflects our commitment to provide 
our retailer customers and consumers 
with competitive prices.

A new catalogue program commences 
in July 2011. The revamped catalogue 
aligns our Mitre 10 brand’s ‘Mighty 
Helpful’ tagline and local community 
focus with our catalogue promotions. 
Initial customer feedback has been 
extremely positive. The catalogues 
will also augment the ‘Locked Down 
Low Prices’ program and promote our 
specialty hardware products. We are 
pleased to offer independent hardware 
retailers and consumers access to 
improved promotions. 

We expect the hardware industry 
to go through significant change in 
the next 12 months and Mitre 10 is 
in great shape to take advantage of 
opportunities as they arise. We have 
enjoyed considerable success from 
our turnaround initiatives described 
previously. We will continue to focus 
on these turnaround initiatives, 
although areas of emphasis are 
likely to shift to suit the needs of our 
business and independent hardware 
retailers. We have an unwavering 
commitment to the independent 
hardware sector as the only true 
independent hardware retail network 
in Australia. 

As a wholesaler to the industry, we 
will not compete directly with our own 
network. Management is working on 
strategies to keep Mitre 10 nimble 
and able to respond quickly and 
help to protect the independent 
retailer network and its members 
from competition.

An iconic Australian brand, Mitre 
10 has entered an exciting new 
phase, and now has the foundation 
to successfully compete in the 
hardware industry.

Independence is worth 
fighting for.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 21

3,000

pROdUCT RANgE 
ExpANSiON

M E E T I N G   
reT ailer  & con sumer 
N E E D S

22

C O R P O R A T E   S O C I A L   R E S P O N S I B I L I T Y

CorPorAte 
social 
responsibility

Metcash strives to conduct business 
in a socially responsible manner. Our 
business success is linked to the 
way we operate sustainably. Social, 
economic, environmental and ethical 
considerations are embedded in  
all we do.

The Metcash Sustainability 
Committee, comprising the CEO 
and key senior management, has 
formally adopted a suite of policies 
and procedures to guide sustainability 
initiatives and improve planning.

Our people are 
the foundation of 
our organisation. 
Responsibility and 
personal accountability 
are core values that  
drive our people.

Our People
Our people are the foundation of 
our organisation. Responsibility and 
personal accountability are core 
values that drive our people. Our 
employees are supported through 
talent management, leadership 
development, employee engagement 
and workplace relations. 

Talent Management
A key business priority is to attract, 
develop and retain high calibre 
staff. In 2010, Metcash introduced 
a mandatory online assessment 
tool to help improve the quality of 
candidates. Managers receive ongoing 
recruitment and selection training to 
ensure recruitment is conducted with 
consistency and fairness.

The Metcash Talent Management 
Framework, an evaluation and 
appraisal tool, was further 
strengthened this year. Competencies 
associated with different leadership 
levels were simplified to enhance 
the appraisal process and an 
internal 360 degree process was 
implemented to support senior 
management development.

Succession planning processes 
continue to identify top talent, with 
individual development plans designed 
for high potential employees.

Leadership Development
The company continues to develop 
current and future leadership 
capability. The Metcash Leadership 
Academy offers employees access to 
learning opportunities and programs at 
all leadership levels. Programs include 
the Diploma of Management, ‘LIFT’ 
Warehouse Leadership Program and 
three Senior Management programs 
that focus on managing operations, 
projects and people. In December 
2010, a pilot program for the 
Advanced Diploma of Management 
was completed. 

Staff across the company can 
participate in core level programs 
and e-learning solutions. Employees 
are also supported in completing 
accredited vocational and tertiary 
education through the Metcash 
Employee Vocational Education 
Sponsorship program (MEVES). 

Employee Wellbeing
The Metcash Pro-fit programs, 
introduced in 2005, continue to 
support employee health and 
wellbeing through a number of 
initiatives including annual flu 
vaccinations, employee counselling, 
corporate gym membership and 
health assessments. Camp Metcash, 
a holiday program for the children of 
staff, is also available.

To help staff enhance their work-life 
balance, policies were introduced and 
we took flexible working arrangements 
into account. These included a 
compressed working week, purchase 
of additional annual leave and access 
to part time employment.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 23

Diversity
Metcash actively seeks to provide 
fair and equal opportunities to all 
employees. Workplace diversity 
and an updated equal opportunity 
program are being finalised. A range 
of programs will be implemented in 
the 2012 financial year, specifically 
designed to identify and develop 
female talent.

Workplace Relations
During the 2011 financial year, 20 
industrial agreements were negotiated 
or re-negotiated (including two within 
the new Mitre 10 business). There 
was no work lost through industrial 
activity. Metcash’s high levels of 
customer service were maintained 
during negotiations. 

Metcash continues to apply a 
fiscally responsible approach to 
wage movements by budgeting for 
increases the business can afford 
and negotiating for productivity 
improvements or reductions in the 
cost of doing business, in order to 
fund increases. 

Health and Safety in  
Our Workplaces
Metcash is strongly committed to 
keeping its work environment safe  
and promoting staff health. We  
have a culture that is intolerant of  
workplace injuries.

Metcash achieved significant 
reductions in its key safety 
performance measures in the 2011 
financial year. The Lost Time Injury 
Frequency Rate (LTIFR) and Lost Time 

Injuries (LTI), improved by 18% and 
14% respectively, representing three 
years of sustained improvements. A 
major reduction of 21% in the number 
of workers compensation claims was 
also achieved. However, average 
workers compensation claim cost and 
hours lost rose, due mainly to ongoing 
claims inherited from new businesses. 
The company will continue to work 
to improve health, safety and injury 
management metrics for these 
new businesses.

Values are nothing 
without integrity

Values

24

C O R P O R A T E   S O C I A L   R E S P O N S I B I L I T Y  C O N T I N U E D

Five-year OHS Lag Indicators

2011

2010

2009

2008

2007

People
Lost time injury (LTI)

CASH & CARRY DISTRIBUTION — TOTAL SALES

Lost time injury frequency rate (LTIFR)(1)

209

21.3

244

25.9

273

30.8

275

27.3

317

25.7

Severity rate(2)

531.6

456.4

883.3

Key Health and Safety 
Achievements
Key achievements during the 2011 
financial year were:

 › An increased focus on key risk 

areas targeting mobile plant and 
manual handling activities with site 
reviews conducted at all locations;

 › A significant reduction of our 

50

 › Developing and implementing 
the Metcash Safety Excellence 
Program, an internal Occupational 
Health and Safety and Injury 
Management audit program that 
resulted in all Metcash sites being 
audited during the financial year; 

workers compensation premiums 
in Victoria and a reduction in 
the bank guarantee for our self 
insurance licence in Western 
CASH & CARRY DISTRIBUTION — REPORTED RESULT
Australia due to improved OHS and 
injury management performance in 
these two states; and

0

 › Developing risk assessments and 
safe operating procedures for 
our new IGA Fresh meat facility in 
Western Australia;

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

CASH & CARRY DISTRIBUTION — TOTAL SALES

 › The introduction of a web-based 
incident notification system 
enabling timely reporting of 
workplace incidents and the 
identification of corrective actions 
to prevent the reoccurrence of 
similar incidents;

 › The appointment of occupational 

health nurses at all major 
distribution centres resulting 
in improved pre-employment 
medicals for new employees and 
as part of our early intervention 
program providing timely 
injury management support at 
these sites;

350

300

250

200

150

100

0

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

30

25

Environment(3)
CO2 emission (Scope1&2)

2010

2009

tonnes

102,515

79,706

07

08

09

10

11

7
1
3

5
7
2

3
7
2

3
4
2

Waste to landfill

93,647
CASH & CARRY DISTRIBUTION — REPORTED RESULT
5,735

47,347

5,102

tonnes

tonnes

Recycling

Packaged food donated to Foodbank(4)

kg

254,630

N/A

Notes: 

35

1. LTIFR is the number of lost time injuries per million hours worked.

2. Severity rate is the number of lost days per million hours worked.

3. Reporting period is the year to June.

4.  Foodbank Australia is a not-for-profit, non-denominational organisation that seeks  

20

and distributes food and grocery industry donations to welfare agencies which feed the hungry. Foodbank is  
endorsed by the Australian Food and Grocery Council as the food industry’s preferred means of disposal of 
surplus product.

10

15

5

0

down 
by  
18.0%

TOTal lTIFr
21.3

.

7
5
2

.

3
7
2

.

7
0
3

.

9
5
2

07

08

09

10

11

TOTal lTI
209

down 
by  
14.0%

 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 25

Our Processes

Product Safety and Public 
Health 
Metcash continues to implement 
systems that ensure its business pillars 
comply with food safety and food 
labeling legislation. Metcash assists 
its independent retail customers with 
training and implementation of retail 
food safety programs.

A national ‘Approved Supplier 
Program’ seeks to ensure all Metcash 
branded products are supplied 
under appropriate Supplied Quality 
Assurance certification schemes using 
safe and ethical methods. Private 
label products operate under product 
specification management and trade 
measurement monitoring systems, 
and are also subject to periodic 
physical, chemical and microbiological  
batch testing.

Food Safety Standards 
Hazard Analysis and Critical Control 
Points (HACCP) based food safety 
programs are in place at all Metcash 
warehouses. These food safety 
programs are reviewed and certified to 
HACCP standards by third parties. All 
audits conducted during the past year 
confirmed that Metcash sites continue 
to operate within legislated food safety 
standards with no critical or major 
non-conformance. 

Business Continuity 
Management
Robust Business Continuity Programs 
(BCP’s) are in place at each site. 
Metcash continues to develop, review 
and test existing site BCP’s as well as 
establishing ‘Early Warning’ network 
alerts. Response and recovery 
procedures were effective during the 
recent natural disasters experienced 
in Queensland. 

Enterprise Risk Management
Metcash’s approach to risk 
management is guided by the 
Australian/New Zealand risk 
management standard AS/NZ 
4360 (currently being aligned 
to ISO 31000:2009) and other 

applicable international standards. 
The company’s Risk Management 
Framework is integrated with day to 
day activities and is supported by a 
dedicated risk management team. 
The Metcash Risk Management 
Policy which is available on the 
Corporate Governance section of 
the Metcash website www.metcash.
com, formalises and communicates 
the approach Metcash adopts to 
manage risk. 

Ongoing risk management activities 
now include: 

 › Regular confirmation of key 
controls via site attestations; 

 › Reporting key risk incidents at site 
level in a centralised system; 

 › Recording and monitoring key risk 
indicators (monitoring of residual 
risk levels); 

 › Follow-up on risk treatment/action 

plans; 

 › Escalation of issues; 

 › A Business and Ethics Policy 
that empowers staff to ‘blow 
the whistle’ on fraud, corruption 
and illegal conducts using an 
independent Ethics Hotline; and 

 › Regular reporting to senior 

management and the Board. 

Metcash has fully implemented its 
risk oversight and risk management 
reporting and compliance program 
based on Risk Management Standard 
AUS/NZ 4360. 

The Environment
We strive to minimise our operational 
impact on the environment, improve 
business sustainability practices and 
realise tangible resource efficiencies. 

In 2010, Metcash was recognised 
for its efforts by being listed on the 
Carbon Disclosure Project Leaders’ 
Index with 30 other corporations.

Our Business Footprint

Energy and Water 
Conservation
Metcash’s electricity and water 
consumption, and carbon emissions 

per employee increased in 2011 to 
17,300 kWh, 20.3kL and 17.88 tonnes 
respectively. Last year’s consumption 
per employee was 14,534 kWh of 
electricity, 14.87 tonnes of carbon 
and 19.3kL of water. The modest rise 
was due to the impact of the Mitre 10 
acquisition.

Sustainable Workplaces and 
Consolidated Logistics
A new distribution centre under 
construction in Huntingwood, Western 
Sydney is designed to achieve a 
Four Green Star rating from the 
Green Building Council of Australia’s 
Industrial Design & As-Built tools.

As part of our energy performance 
contract, installation of energy 
and water saving initiatives have 
commenced at our facility in South 
Australia. These works are guaranteed 
to reduce electricity consumption on 
the site by 122,000 kWh and reduce 
carbon emissions by 6% with a 
6 year payback.

The company received a Federal 
Government grant to install a 16.3 
kW solar photovoltaic (pv) system 
at its ALM Alice Springs facility. The 
solar pv system is expected to reduce 
electricity consumption onsite by 58% 
with a 5 year payback.

Landfill and Recycling
Metcash continues to work to improve 
recycling and reduce waste sent to 
landfill. Recycling is encouraged at all 
sites. The company donates usable 
but not saleable packaged foods in 
order of 250 tonnes to Foodbank 
Australia (covered in more detail  
under Community).

Staff Involvement
Metcash staff are encouraged to 
participate in voluntary work with 
site based ‘Green Teams’. These 
teams meet regularly to identify and 
implement projects to help Metcash 
meet sustainability objectives.

26

C O R P O R A T E   S O C I A L   R E S P O N S I B I L I T Y  C O N T I N U E D

 From LeFt: Luke WestLey (Aussie AppLes), trAcy BevAn (mcGrAth FoundAtion), tim mAnic (iGA Fresh – QLd stAte produce mAnAGer).

Our Suppliers and 
Products 
We seek to encourage our suppliers 
to support sustainable business 
practices for food and packaging 
products. Wherever possible, we aim 
to supply products which are safe, 
healthy, easy to use and reduce our 
environmental impact. 

Sustainable Business Practices 
Metcash implemented a Sustainable 
Supply Chain Management Program 
based on world’s best practice, to 
ensure suppliers meet our minimum 
safety and ethical standards. 

We are working with suppliers on 
issues raised by consumers to ensure 
our private label products are of the 
highest quality. 

Our supplier agreement and our 
new Sustainable Supply Chain 
Management Policy each require that 
no genetically modified ingredients 
be used in our private label products 
(eg: IGA Signature and Black & Gold 
brands) including food additives, 
processing aids and enzymes. 

Better Products
To assess the sustainability of the 
packaging used on Metcash private 
label products, we have integrated 
the Australian Packaging Covenant’s 
Sustainable Packaging Guidelines in 
our design and ranging stages.

Stakeholder Engagement
We are participating in a multi-
stakeholder process to improve tuna 
traceability throughout the supply 
chain. Our IGA Signature and Black & 
Gold canned tuna products are made 
from the most sustainable tuna and 
skipjack. More details are available at  
www.iga.com.au. Metcash is a 
member of the Roundtable on 
Sustainable Palm Oil (RSPO), and has 
embraced the Principles and Criteria 
for Sustainable Palm Oil Production. 

Our Customers 
We are committed to meeting 
our obligations to customers and 
actively encouraging them to support 
sustainable business practices for 
food and packaging products.

Sustainability@Retail 
Our Sustainability Team developed 
Sustainability@Retail, a support 
program specifically for IGA 
independent retailers. Program 
initiatives include carbon footprint 
measurement, encouraging reduced 
energy and water consumption, 
and encouraging the use of solar 
photovoltaic panels. 

Many of the IGA independent 
retailers continue their involvement 
in Sustainability@Retail. More details 
of the Sustainability@Retail program 
can be found at www.iga.com.au. 
Over the years, many IGA retailers 
have independently decided to make 
their stores ‘plastic bag free’ and 
undertake environmentally beneficial 
refurbishments. 

Metcash offers product ranges with an 
emphasis on ‘fair trade’ (fair work and 
trade) practices.

HoW THe   
locals like iT

igA 
COmmUNiTY 
SUppORT

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 27

 From LeFt: Luke WestLey (Aussie AppLes), trAcy BevAn (mcGrAth FoundAtion), tim mAnic (iGA Fresh – QLd stAte produce mAnAGer).

iGA>d WArehouse stAFF LoAd emerGency suppLies on to A heLicopter At the heiGht oF the QueensLAnd FLood disAster. the heLicopter WAs Bound For An indiGenous community isoLAted By the FLoods.

IGA retailers have raised 
in excess of $55,000,000 
over the past nine 
years through the IGA 
Community Chest and 
associated programs. 
Two cents from every 
sale of an IGA Signature 
product, and one cent 
from every Black & 
Gold product, has been 
collected and distributed 
to over 7,000 local 
community groups, not-
for-profit organisations 
and other worthy causes.

Community
Metcash and our IGA independent 
retailers continue to support the 
communities in which we serve. 
Two cents from every IGA Signature 
product and one cent from every 
Black & Gold product sold goes to 
the IGA Community Chest. The IGA 
Community Chest has raised in excess 
of $55,000,000 over the past nine 
years. These funds have supported 
over 7,000 local community groups, 
not-for-profit organisations and other 
community causes. 

Metcash staff support a number of 
different charitable events each year, 
including Pink Ribbon Day, Daffodil 
Day, World’s Greatest Shave and 
Movember, a charity event with 
the aim of raising vital funds and 
awareness for men’s health specifically 
prostate cancer and depression in 
men.  This year, Metcash matched 
employees’ contributions to 
Movember to the tune of $5,000.

Metcash donates usable but 
not saleable packaged foods to 
Foodbank Australia, a not-for-profit, 
non-denominational organisation 
that seeks and distributes food and 
grocery industry donations to welfare 
agencies.  Donations of 254 tonnes 
were made in the last reporting period, 
helping reduce landfill waste, related 
fees and carbon emissions.

The IGA Spirit  
Overcoming Adversity
The natural disasters of late December 
2010 and early 2011 devastated many 
local communities. Floods occurred in 
Queensland and Victoria, Cyclone Yasi 
affected Far North Queensland and 
bushfires affected WA.

During the Queensland floods, over 
50 independent stores were flooded 
or closed. Metcash’s IGA Fresh 
Queensland facility at Rocklea was 
also inundated by flood waters.

IGA Distribution (IGA>D) worked to 
assist retailers across the state to 
support their local communities. The 
business also worked closely with the 
Queensland government and other 
stakeholders to maintain supply of 
essential provisions to communities 
across the state. Army Hercules 
aircraft and helicopters were used to 
deliver stock to isolated communities.

Staff from various states volunteered 
to assist retailer in cleaning up. Over 
$714,000 was raised through the IGA 
Flood Relief Program. This together 
with donations and funds raised by 
Metcash and IGA independent retailers 
resulted in excess of $1 million being 
raised. Many independent retailers 
supported their communities with 
further donations, food and shelter.

Supporting the  
McGrath Foundation
Over the past 2 years, IGA has 
rolled out more than four campaigns 
raising over $120,000 to help fund 
two McGrath IGA Breast Care 
Nurse positions.

igA 

COmmUNiTY 

SUppORT

28

E X E C U T I V E   T E A M

exeCutive 
teaM

Andrew Reitzer

Adrian Gratwicke

Silvestro Morabito

ceo metcash Group of companies
Date of Appointment to metcash Limited:  
18 April 2005. 

Andrew Reitzer has 33 years’ experience in the 
retail/wholesale industry. Previous positions at 
Metro Cash and Carry Limited include Group 
Operations Director, heading operations in Russia 
and Israel, Marketing Director, IT Director and 
managing various operating divisions. 

chief Financial officer
An experienced finance professional, Adrian 
Gratwicke brings over 23 years’ commercial and 
industry experience to his recently appointed 
position as Chief Financial Officer. Since joining 
Metcash in April 1998, he has held several senior 
roles including National Accounting Manager, 
National Commercial Manager IGA Distribution, 
General Manager Mergers & Acquisitions, Risk and 
Investor Relations and General Manager Finance. 

ceo iGA distribution
Silvestro Morabito has over 31 years experience 
in grocery retailing both locally and internationally. 
During his 15 years with Safeway in Victoria, he 
held various senior positions in operations and 
IT. Silvestro was then recruited by Dairy Farm 
International and held senior management roles in 
New Zealand and Singapore. 

In 2005 he was appointed CEO of Action 
Supermarkets overseeing the sale of the 
supermarkets and the consolidation of the FAL 
retail brands. He was then appointed General 
Manager, WA, IGA Distribution. In February of 2010 
Silvestro was appointed CEO of IGA Distribution. 

Peter Dubbelman

Fergus Collins

Harry Rumpler

ceo campbells Wholesale 
Appointed CEO of Campbells Wholesale in  
June 1998, Peter Dubbelman has over 28  
years’ experience in fast moving consumer  
goods distribution primarily in multi-site  
general management. 

Peter has successfully initiated major growth of the 
business through the establishment of three distinct 
divisions, each aligned with the specific needs of 
the organised and independent convenience, and 
hospitality markets throughout Australia. 

ceo Australian Liquor marketers
Fergus Collins joined ALM in December 2001 
as Commercial Manager Queensland and was 
promoted to General Manager Queensland in  
May 2004. He became General Manager, 
Independent Brands Australia in July 2006. In 
February 2007, he was appointed Chief Executive 
Officer and is a graduate of the Metcash Executive 
Leadership Program. 

ceo iGA Fresh
Harry Rumpler has been involved in the retail 
industry for 34 years, holding various positions with 
both chain groups and suppliers. Over this period 
Harry held positions within store operations and 
buying, as well as merchandising and marketing 
roles. Harry joined the Company in November 1997 
as National Fresh Food Manager for Merchandise 
and in 2005 was appointed to General Manager 
IGAD Queensland. He was then appointed to 
head up the new area of IGA Fresh as CEO in 
November 2007.

ASSOCIATE DIPLOMA IN FOOD RETAILING (FIT) EXECUTIVE DIPLOMA IN RETAIL MANAGEMENT (ACFRS)BA (HONS), ACA, MBA B COMM MBLMBA (MELB)B COMM (HONS) (DUBLIN), B SC MGMT (IRELAND),  MBA (UNIVERSITY OF QUEENSLAND)M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 29

Ken Bean

Bernard J Hale

Mike Jablonski

chief executive, Group Logistics and 
corporate development
Ken Bean has over 40 years’ experience in the 
retail wholesale industry. Previously Ken was 
General Manager of Coles-Myer Logistics Pty Ltd 
and was also responsible for Coles-Myer Asia’s 
buying offices. Ken has also held senior roles in 
corporate development as well as finance and 
administration. He also has significant industrial 
property development and construction experience 
and is currently a member of the Australian 
Logistics Council. 

chief information officer
Bernard Hale was formerly a Director of Metro 
Cash and Carry Limited, South Africa. Bernard 
has 36 years of IT industry experience, 25 of 
which have been within the Metro Cash and Carry 
organisation. Previous positions held in Metro 
include Operation Director IT, Group IT Director, 
Group Operations Director (Domestic)  
and Corporate Group IT Director. 

He was appointed Chief Information Officer of 
Metcash Trading Limited in December 2002. Prior 
to being appointed to his current role he served as 
an Executive Director of Metcash Trading Limited. 

Group merchandise director
Mike Jablonski has 39 years’ experience in 
the food industry. Previous positions include 
Merchandise Executive Foods of OK Bazaars; 
Merchandise and Marketing Director of Score Food 
Holdings Ltd; Deputy Group Merchandise Director 
of Metro Cash and Carry Limited; Director of 
Distribution and Retail Development of Metro Cash 
and Carry Limited. 

Mike is the Group Merchandise Director and is 
responsible for the Group’s Merchandise, Supplier 
relationships, and the income derived thereof. 

 David Johnston

Greg Watson

chief human resources officer
David Johnston joined Metcash in December 
2001. With over 33 years experience in all facets 
of Human Resources Management gained from 
some of Australia’s and the world’s leading FMCG 
organisations, David is responsible for enhancing 
the human capital of Metcash through cultural, 
leadership and people development.

General counsel and company secretary
Greg Watson joined Metcash in April 2005 as Legal 
Counsel and was promoted to General Counsel 
in February 2008. He was appointed Company 
Secretary in December 2010.

Greg has 21 years professional and industry 
experience initially in private legal practice, followed 
by corporate legal counsel roles with multinational 
FMCG organisations. Greg is a graduate of the 
Metcash Executive Leadership Program.

MBA, GRAD DIP BUS, DIP ACCM BUS (EMPLOYMENT RELATIONS), FAHRI, JPB TH (CAN)LLM, Dip Law30

B O A R D   O F   D I R E C T O R S

boArd oF  
directors

Peter L Barnes

Carlos S Dos Santos

non-executive chairman 
Date of Appointment to Metcash Limited: 18 April 2005 
Member of the Remuneration & Nomination Committee

non-executive chairman (retired)
Date of Appointment to Metcash Limited: 18 April 2005  
Member of the Remuneration & Nomination Committee

Peter Barnes is Chairman of Ansell Ltd, a Director 
of News Corporation and Chairman of Samuel 
Smith & Sons Pty Ltd. He also serves as Chairman 
of the Melbourne Business School. Mr Barnes was 
formerly an executive with Philip Morris International 
Inc. and held several senior management positions 
both here in Australia and overseas.

Peter was appointed Chairman of Metcash Limited 
on 2 September 2010 and has been involved 
with the Metcash business as a director since 
November 1999. 

Fiona Balfour

Mr dos Santos retired as a director of Metcash 
Limited on 2 September 2010

Carlos dos Santos is a chartered accountant and 
a director of various companies trading in Africa 
and the Far East. He has had 42 years’ industry 
experience and has been involved with the 
Metcash business as a director since May 1998. 

non-executive director
Date of Appointment to Metcash Limited: 16 November 2010 
Member of the Remuneration & Nomination Committee

Fiona Balfour is a former Chief Information 
Officer and Member of the Qantas Executive 
Committee with responsibilities for information 
technology, procurement, property and human 
resource services for Qantas worldwide. Fiona was 
subsequently Chief Information Officer of Telstra 
and executive advisor at each of Medibank Private 
and Link Market Services. 

Fiona is an Independent Non-executive Director 
of Salmat Limited, an Independent Non-executive 
Director of TAL Australia, a Member of the 
Information Technology Faculty Advisory Board 
of Monash University and a Councillor of Knox 
Grammar School. She is a Member and former 
Councillor of Chief Executive Women; a former 
Non-executive director of Societe Internationale 
of Télécommunications Aéronautiques (SITA SC) 
– Geneva, Switzerland; and former Trustee of the 
National Breast Cancer Foundation. 

Andrew Reitzer

ceo metcash Group of companies
Date of Appointment to Metcash Limited: 18 April 2005 

Andrew Reitzer has 33 years’ experience in the 
retail/wholesale industry. Previous positions at 
Metro Cash and Carry Limited include Group 
Operations Director, heading operations in Russia 
and Israel, Marketing Director, IT Director and 
managing various operating divisions. 

Michael R Butler

non-executive director
Date of Appointment to Metcash Limited: 8 February 2007 
Member of the Audit Risk & Compliance Committee

Michael Butler has extensive experience in 
investment banking gained as an Executive Director 
of Bankers Trust’s Corporate Finance group and as 
Executive Vice President of its Private Equity group. 
He is currently a director of N. M. Superannuation 
Pty Ltd and AMP Superannuation Limited. He was 
previously a Non-executive Director and Chairman 
of various public and private companies. 

BA (Hons), MBA, GRAD DIP InFoRMATIon MAnAGEMEnT, FAICD B COMMERCE (HONS), MBA CA (SA)B SC, MBA B COMM MBLM E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 31

Neil D Hamilton

Mike Jablonski

Edwin Jankelowitz

non-executive director 
Date of Appointment to Metcash Limited: 7 February 2008 
Chairman of the Remuneration & Nomination Committee

Neil Hamilton is based in Perth and Sydney 
and has over 28 years’ experience in the legal 
profession and in business with substantial 
experience in a number of industries including 
investment/funds management, insurance, banking 
and resources. 

Neil is Chairman of OZ Minerals Ltd and Miclyn 
Express Offshore Limited. He was appointed 
Chairman of the Remuneration & Nomination 
Committee on 1 September 2010. 

Group merchandise director (retired from Board)
Date of Appointment to Metcash Limited: 18 April 2005 

non-executive director
Date of Appointment to Metcash Limited: 18 April 2005 

Mike Jablonski has 39 years’ experience in 
the food industry. Previous positions include 
Merchandise Executive Foods of OK Bazaars; 
Merchandise and Marketing Director of Score Food 
Holdings Ltd; Deputy Group Merchandise Director 
of Metro Cash and Carry Limited; Director of 
Distribution and Retail Development of Metro Cash 
and Carry Limited. 

Mike is the Group Merchandise Director of 
Metcash Limited and is responsible for the Group’s 
Merchandise, Supplier relationships, and the 
income derived thereof. He retired as a director of 
Metcash Limited on 2 September 2010. 

Edwin Jankelowitz qualified as a Chartered 
Accountant (SA) in 1966 and spent 12 years with 
Adcock Ingram Ltd – promoted over time to Group 
Company Secretary and Finance Director. 

After consulting in business management and tax 
for three years, Edwin spent 14 years with Caxton 
Ltd progressing from Finance Director to Managing 
Director and Chairman before joining Metcash. 
He has spent over 37 years in corporate offices of 
listed companies and was a member of the Income 
Tax Special Court in South Africa for 20 years. 

Edwin was CFO of Metcash until January 2011 and 
became a Non-executive Director on 1 April 2011.

Richard A Longes

V. Dudley Rubin

Greg Watson

non-executive director 
Date of Appointment to Metcash Limited: 18 April 2005 
Chairman of the Audit Risk & Compliance Committee 
Solicitor (non-practising)

Richard Longes has been a director of a number 
of public companies and a member of various 
government bodies and inquiries for more than 
20 years. He is currently Chairman of Austbrokers 
Holdings Ltd and a Director of Boral Limited and 
Investec Bank (Australia) Ltd. 

Richard was formerly a co-founder and principal 
of the corporate advisory and private equity firm, 
Wentworth Associates, and prior to that a partner 
of Freehill Hollingdale & Page, solicitors. 

non-executive director
Date of Appointment to Metcash Limited: 18 April 2005 
Member of the Audit Committee

Dudley Rubin is a chartered accountant and is a 
director of various companies trading in Africa.  
He has had 28 years’ industry experience and 
has been involved with the Metcash business as 
a director since May 1998.

General counsel and company secretary
Greg Watson joined Metcash in April 2005 as Legal 
Counsel and was promoted to General Counsel 
in February 2008. He was appointed Company 
Secretary in December 2010.

Greg has 21 years professional and industry 
experience initially in private legal practice, followed 
by corporate legal counsel roles with multinational 
FMCG organisations. Greg is a graduate of the 
Metcash Executive Leadership Program.

BA (SYDNEY), LLB (SYDNEY), MBA (NSW)LLB (UWA) B COMM, CA (SA)CA (SA), H DIP BDP, MBABA, LLB, MBALLM, Dip Law32

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE STATEMENT

The Directors of Metcash Limited (Metcash or the Company) support and adhere to the principles of corporate governance set out in the Metcash 
Corporate Governance Statement. In supporting these principles, the Directors acknowledge the need for the highest standards of behaviour 
and accountability. 

The Directors believe that the Company’s policies and practices have complied in all substantial respects with corporate governance best practice in 
Australia, including the ASX Corporate Governance Council Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations (Principles). 

CHANGES TO CORPORATE GOVERNANCE PRINCIPLES
 The Company notes that a number of changes to the Principles take effect from the first financial year commencing after 1 January 2011. While 
compliance with those Principles is not obligatory for this financial year, the Company is implementing changes to ensure compliance at the earliest 
opportunity with the ASX Corporate Governance Council’s recommendations to transition to the new Principles.

SUMMARY OF COMPLIANCE WITH PRINCIPLES AND RECOMMENDATIONS 
The table below summarises the Company’s compliance with the Corporate Governance Council’s recommendations.

RECOMMENDATION

COMPLY  
YES/ NO REFERENCE/ EXPLANATION

PRINCIPLE 1 – LAY SOLID FOUNDATIONS FOR MANAGEMENT AND OVERSIGHT

1.1 Companies should establish the functions reserved to the Board and those delegated to senior 

Yes

Page 34

executives and disclose those functions. 

1.2 Companies should disclose the process for evaluating the performance of senior executives. 

1.3 Companies should provide the information indicated in the guide to reporting on Principle 1. 

PRINCIPLE 2 – STRUCTURE THE BOARD TO ADD VALUE

2.1 A majority of the Board should be Independent Directors.

2.2

2.3

2.4

The Chair should be an Independent Director. 

The roles of Chair and Chief Executive Officer should not be exercised by the same individual. 

The Board should establish a Nomination Committee. 

2.5 Companies should disclose the process for evaluating the performance of the Board, its Committees  

and individual Directors. 

2.6 Companies should provide the information indicated in the guide to reporting on Principle 2. 

PRINCIPLE 3 – PROMOTE ETHICAL AND RESPONSIBLE DECISION-MAKING

Page 34

Page 34

Page 35

Page 35

Page 35

Page 36

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

3.1 Companies should establish a code of conduct and disclose the code or a summary of the code as to: 

Yes

Website www.metcash.com 

 ›
 ›

 ›

the practices necessary to maintain confidence in the Company’s integrity;
the practices necessary to take into account their legal obligations and the reasonable expectations 
of their stakeholders;
the responsibility and accountability of individuals for reporting and investigating reports of 
unethical practices.

3.2 Companies should establish a policy concerning diversity and disclose the policy or a summary of 

N/A

that policy. The policy should include requirements for the Board to establish measurable objectives 
for achieving gender diversity for the Board to assess annually both the objectives and progress in 
achieving them.

Systems and processes are 
in place to ensure compliance 
when these recommendations 
take effect next financial year

3.3 Companies should disclose in each annual report the measurable objectives for achieving gender diversity 
set by the Board and in accordance with the diversity policy and progress towards achieving them.

3.4 Companies should disclose in each annual report the proportion of women employees in the whole 

organisation, women in senior executive positions and on the Board.

3.5 Companies should provide the information indicated in the guide to reporting on Principle 3. 

N/A

N/A

Yes

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 33

PRINCIPLE 4 – SAFEGUARD INTEGRITY IN FINANCIAL REPORTING

4.1

4.2

The Board should establish an Audit Committee.

The Audit Committee should be structured so that it: 
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›

consists only of Non-executive Directors;
consists of a majority of Independent Directors;
is chaired by an Independent Chair, who is not Chair of the Board;
has at least three members.

4.3

The Audit Committee should have a formal charter.

4.4 Companies should provide the information indicated in the guide to reporting on Principle 4.

PRINCIPLE 5 – MAKE TIMELY AND BALANCED DISCLOSURE

Yes

Yes

Page 36

Page 36

Yes

Yes

Page 37

Website www.metcash.com

5.1 Companies should establish written policies designed to ensure compliance with ASX Listing Rule 

Yes

Website www.metcash.com 

disclosure requirements and to ensure accountability at a senior executive level for that compliance and 
disclose those policies or a summary of those policies.

5.2 Companies should provide the information indicated in the guide to reporting on Principle 5. 

Yes

PRINCIPLE 6 – RESPECT THE RIGHTS OF SHAREHOLDERS

6.1 Companies should design a communications policy for promoting effective communication with 

Yes

Page 38

shareholders and encouraging their participation at general meetings and disclose their policy or a 
summary of that policy. 

6.2 Companies should provide the information indicated in the guide to reporting on Principle 6. 

Yes

PRINCIPLE 7 – RECOGNISE AND MANAGE RISK

7.1 Companies should establish policies for the oversight and management of material business risks and 

Yes

Page 38

disclose a summary of those policies.

7.2

7.3

The Board should require management to design and implement the risk management and internal 
control system to manage the company’s material business risks and report to it on whether those risks 
are being managed effectively. The Board should disclose that management has reported to it as to the 
effectiveness of the Company’s management of its material business risks. 

Yes

Page 39

The Board should disclose whether it has received assurance from the Chief Executive Officer (or 
equivalent) and the Chief Financial Officer (or equivalent) that the declaration provided in accordance 
with section 295A of the Corporations Act is founded on a sound system of risk management and 
internal control and that the system is operating effectively in all material respects in relation to financial 
reporting risks. 

Yes

Page 39

7.4 Companies should provide the information indicated in the guide to reporting on Principle 7. 

Yes

PRINCIPLE 8 – REMUNERATE FAIRLY AND RESPONSIBLY

8.1

8.2

The Board should establish a Remuneration Committee. 

Yes

Page 40

The Remuneration Committee should be structured so that it:
 ›
 ›
 ›

consists of a majority of Independent Directors;
is chaired by an Independent Chair
has at least three members.

8.3 Companies should clearly distinguish the structure of Non-executive Directors’ remuneration from that of 

Yes

Executive Directors and senior executives. 

Refer to Remuneration 
Report

8.4 Companies should provide the information indicated in the guide to reporting on Principle 8.

Yes

The Company’s policies and practices and their relationship to the Council’s recommendations are set out in more detail as follows.

34 C O R P O R A T E   G O V E R N A N C E   S T A T E M E N T  C O N T I N U E D

PRINCIPLE 1: LAY SOLID FOUNDATION FOR MANAGEMENT AND OVERSIGHT

RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE BOARD AND MANAGEMENT
The Board of Directors is responsible for setting the strategic direction of the Company and for overseeing and monitoring its businesses and affairs.

The Board reviews and approves the Company’s strategic and business plans and guiding policies. Day-to-day management of the Company’s affairs 
and implementation of its strategy and policy initiatives are delegated to the Chief Executive Officer and senior executives, who operate in accordance 
with Board-approved policies and delegated limits of authority.

charting the direction, strategies and financial objectives of the Company;

The principal functions of the Board include:
 ›
 › monitoring implementation of those strategies and the operational and financial performance and risk of each of the Company’s activities;
 ›
 ›
 › monitoring compliance with legal regulatory requirements, including occupational health and safety laws, product safety and the protection of 

reviewing major capital expenditure, acquisitions, divestments and funding;
reviewing performance, remuneration and succession of senior management;

the environment;

 › monitoring the Company’s relationships with its stakeholders and compliance with ethical standards and the Company’s Code of Conduct;
 ›

corporate governance generally.

The Board’s Charter can be found on the Company’s website www.metcash.com under the heading ‘Corporate Governance’.

EVALUATING THE PERFORMANCE OF SENIOR EXECUTIVES
On an annual basis, the Remuneration & Nomination Committee reviews the performance of the Chief Executive Officer against qualitative and 
quantitative criteria, which include profit performance, other financial measures and achievement of the Company’s strategic objectives. During the 2011 
financial year, the Chief Executive Officer’s performance was reviewed in accordance with the process specified above.

The Company maintains a performance evaluation process which measures other senior executives against previously agreed Key Performance 
Indicators and Key Behavioural Indicators. This process is performed formally once a year with quarterly reviews and took place for each senior 
executive during the 2011 financial year.

Senior executives have access to continuing education to update and enhance their skills and knowledge.

PRINCIPLE 2: STRUCTURE THE BOARD TO ADD VALUE

A MAJORITY OF THE BOARD SHOULD BE INDEPENDENT DIRECTORS

Appointment to the Board
The Board’s policy for the selection, appointment and re-appointment of Directors is to ensure that the Board possesses an appropriate range of skills, 
experience and expertise to enable the Board to most effectively carry out its responsibilities. As part of this appointment process, the Directors consider 
Board renewal and succession plans and whether the Board is of a size and composition that is conducive to making appropriate decisions.

Prior to Directors standing for re-election, the Remuneration and Nomination Committee reviews the skills and contribution of the Directors concerned 
and decides whether the committee supports their re-election. The committee then recommends its decision to the Board.

When a vacancy exists, or when it is considered that the Board would benefit from the services of a new Director with particular skills, the Remuneration 
& Nomination Committee selects a panel of candidates with appropriate expertise and experience. This may be supplemented with advice from external 
consultants if necessary. The Board, on the Committee’s recommendation, then appoints the most suitable candidate who must stand for election at the 
next general meeting of shareholders.

Directors are not appointed for a fixed term but, under the Company’s Constitution, must be re-elected each 3 years by rotation and are subject to 
Australian Securities Exchange (ASX) Listing Rules and Corporations Act provisions.

Board Composition
Maintaining a balance of experience and skills is an important factor in Board composition. For details of the skills, experience and expertise of the 
individual Directors, and the period of office held by each Director, please refer to page 30, headed ‘Board of Directors’, of this report.

The Board of Metcash is currently constituted as follows:

Independent Non-executive Directors
Six Independent Directors hold key positions that include chairing the Board and the Board Committees of Audit Risk & Compliance and Remuneration 
& Nomination. They provide an external perspective and checks and balances for the interests of all shareholders.

The Board’s six Non-executive Directors (at the date of this report), Mr Barnes, Mr Butler, Mr Hamilton, Mr Longes, Mr Rubin and Mrs Balfour are 
considered by the Board to be Independent Directors.

The Board has adopted a definition of independence which is derived from the definition set out in the Principles. Directors are considered independent 
if they are not a member of management and are free of any business or other relationship that would materially interfere with, or could reasonably be 
perceived to materially interfere with, the independent exercise of their judgement.

When assessing the independence of a Director, the Board will consider whether the Director:
 ›
 ›

is a substantial shareholder of the Company or an officer of, or otherwise associated directly with, a substantial shareholder of the Company;
is employed or has previously been employed in an executive capacity by the Company or another group member and there has not been a period 
of at least three years between ceasing to hold any such employment and serving on the Board;
has within the last three years been a principal of a material professional adviser or a material consultant to the Company or another group member, 
or an employee materially associated with the service provided;
is a material supplier or customer of the Company or other group member, or an officer of or otherwise associated directly or indirectly with a 
material supplier or customer;
has a material contractual relationship with the Company or another group member other than as a Director of the Company.

 ›

 ›

 ›

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 35

The Board regularly assesses whether each Non-executive Director is independent, based on this definition, and in light of information disclosed by 
those Directors that may be relevant to this assessment. 
The six Non-executive Directors are considered to be independent for the following reasons.
 ›

None of the six Non-executive Directors are substantial shareholders of the Company or associated with a substantial shareholder of the Company 
(holding 5% or more of the Company’s issued shares).

 ›

 › Messrs Barnes, Butler, Hamilton and Longes and Mrs Balfour are not employed by, nor have they previously been employed by, the Company or 
another group member. Mr Rubin was employed in executive positions by Metoz, the former group holding company and now a wholly owned 
Metcash subsidiary. That employment ceased on 18 April 2005 when the Metoz scheme became effective.
A period of more than three years has thus elapsed during which Mr Rubin remained as a Metcash Director. Although there has not been ‘...a period 
of at least three years between ceasing such employment and serving on the Board’, it is noted that his role as a Metoz employee did not put him in 
a position of authority, responsibility, and/or directing the activities of Metcash itself and, that this fact, combined with the six year elapsed period are 
important factors in determining his capacity to bring independent judgement to bear on Metcash Board deliberations. At all times, he has been a 
Non-executive Director of Metcash. Given the specific facts of his situation, this test does not preclude him from being considered independent.
The Board considered all relevant factors and concluded that Mr Rubin is an Independent Director.
None of the six Non-executive Directors have a contractual relationship with the group nor have they been a professional adviser or consultant to 
the group or an employee associated with the service provided.
None of the six Non-executive Directors is a material supplier or customer of the Company or an officer of, or otherwise associated directly or 
indirectly with, a material supplier or customer. Materiality is assessed as supplying 2.5% or more of the Company’s annual purchases or a customer 
representing 2.5% or more of the Company’s annual sales.

 ›
 ›

 ›

 › Mr Barnes is Chairman of Samuel Smith & Sons Pty Ltd and a Director and Chairman of Ansell Limited. Mrs Balfour is a director of Salmat Limited. 

All these organisations are suppliers to the Company under normal commercial terms and conditions. However, the level of purchases involved is 
not considered material, being less than 0.4% of the Company’s total purchases.
None of the six Non-executive Directors has a contractual relationship with the Company or another group member, other than as a Director of 
the Company.

 ›

Non-executive Director
Mr Edwin Jankelowitz retired as an Executive Director of the Company on 31 March 2011 and remains a director of the Company from that date. The 
Board considers Mr Jankelowitz to be a Non-executive Director and not an Independent Director.

Executive Directors
The Board has one Executive Director, Mr Andrew Reitzer. Mr Reitzer is the Company’s Chief Executive Officer.

All Directors, whether independent or not, bring an independent judgement to bear on Board decisions.

Independent Professional Advice
The Board has a policy of enabling Directors to seek independent professional advice at the Company’s expense. The Board will review in advance the 
estimated costs for reasonableness, but will not impede Directors from seeking advice.

Company Secretary
All Directors have access to the Company Secretary who is accountable to the Board, through the Chairman, on all governance matters.

THE CHAIR SHOULD BE AN INDEPENDENT DIRECTOR
The Chair, Mr Peter Barnes is considered by the Board to be an Independent Director.

THE ROLES OF CHAIR AND CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER SHOULD NOT BE EXERCISED BY THE SAME INDIVIDUAL
The roles of Chief Executive Officer and Chair are not exercised by the same individual.

THE BOARD SHOULD ESTABLISH A NOMINATION COMMITTEE
The Board has a Remuneration & Nomination Committee.

Remuneration & Nomination Committee
The membership of the Remuneration & Nomination Committee consists of the Non-executive Independent Directors who are listed below, together 
with details of their qualifications and attendance at meetings during the past financial year.

 MEMbER

QuALIFICATIONS

N D Hamilton (c)

LLB

P L Barnes(1)

BComm (Hons), MBA

C S dos Santos(2)

CA (SA)

F E Balfour(3)

BA (Hons), MBA, Grad Dip IM FAICD

(c) Denotes the chairman of the committee

MEETINgS ELIgIbLE TO ATTEND 
DuRINg 2011 FINANCIAL YEAR

MEETINgS ATTENDED DuRINg  
2011 FINANCIAL YEAR

4

4

2

2

4

4

2

2

1  P L Barnes was Chairman of the Remuneration & Nomination Committee until 2 September 2010, when he assumed chairmanship of the Board of Directors. 

N D Hamilton assumed committee chairmanship from that date.
2  C dos Santos retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010.
3  F E Balfour was appointed to Metcash Board on 16 November 2010 and thereafter appointed to the Remuneration & Nomination Committee.

36 C O R P O R A T E   G O V E R N A N C E   S T A T E M E N T  C O N T I N U E D

Responsibilities of the Committee include to:
 ›
 ›
 ›

advise the Board on remuneration of the CEO and senior management;
advise the Board on performance-linked compensation for management;
administer the Metcash Employees Option Plan, the Metcash Performance Rights Plan, and exercise the Board’s discretionary power 
when required;
advise the Board on directorship and Board Committee appointments, Board succession planning and performance of the CEO; and
implement processes to assess the effectiveness of the Board and its Committees.

 ›
 ›

The Committee consists only of Independent Directors and is chaired by an Independent Director who is not Chairman of the Board. 

The Charter of the Committee can be found on the Company’s website www.metcash.com under the heading ‘Corporate Governance’.

PROCESS FOR EVALUATING THE PERFORMANCE OF THE BOARD, ITS COMMITTEES AND INDIVIDUAL DIRECTORS
Annual reviews of the Board, its Committees and Directors are performed using a self-evaluation questionnaire, with an independent review conducted 
each third year using a recognised external Board Performance Consultant. This process was first adopted in 2008. 

The self-evaluation questionnaire has been utilised for the 2009 and 2010 financial years and, accordingly, a recognised Board Performance Consultant 
is conducting the 2011 financial year review.

The 2011 evaluation process is being managed by an external Board Performance Consultant on a confidential basis. Results of the externally produced 
questionnaire and interviews with all Directors and several key management personnel will be provided by way of report to the Board in August 2011. 
The Board expects to respond to the findings of the review during the second half of the 2011 calendar year.

The Directors agreed that the evaluation process had been effective and that the individual discussions with the Chairman had been frank and open. 
The overall conclusion was that the Board and its Committees are effective and are operating at a level that has surpassed the high level identified in the 
2010 evaluation and that decisions are made in a timely manner.

PRINCIPLE 3: PROMOTE ETHICAL AND RESPONSIBLE DECISION-MAKING

ESTABLISH A CODE OF CONDUCT
The Company has a Code of Conduct that applies to Directors and all employees. Subjects covered by the Code include:
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›

equal employment opportunity, discrimination and harassment;
security of Company records and assets and confidentiality guidelines;
conflict of interest, acceptance of gifts, entertainment and services;
fraud, corruption and irregular transactions;
legal compliance;
honest ethical behaviour;
environmental protection and safe working environment.

The Code can be found on the Company’s website www.metcash.com under the heading ‘Corporate Governance’.

Compliance with the Code is checked through the Company’s functions and related processes including internal audit, security, human resources and 
occupational health and safety. New staff members are required to attend an induction program that includes behaviour guidelines. Additionally, the 
Company’s staff appraisal process includes employees’ performance against ‘Key Behavioural Indicators’ as well as ‘Key Performance Indicators’.

The Company has a Business Conduct and Ethics Policy that seeks to encourage all staff and non employees to report any person suspected of poor 
business conduct and ethical practices including fraud and corrupt conduct. The Company also has a Serious Complaints Policy which endeavours 
to protect those who report, in good faith, violations of the Code of Conduct. This policy can be found on the Company’s website www.metcash.com 
under the heading ‘Corporate Governance’.

PRINCIPLE 4: SAFEGUARD INTEGRITY IN FINANCIAL REPORTING

THE BOARD SHOULD ESTABLISH AN AUDIT COMMITTEE
The Board has an Audit, Risk & Compliance Committee which reports regularly to the Board.

The membership of the Audit Risk & Compliance Committee consists of the Non-executive Independent Directors who are listed below, together with 
details of their qualifications and attendance at meetings during the past financial year.

 MEMbER

R A Longes (C)

M R Butler

V D Rubin

(C) Chairman.

QuALIFICATIONS

BA, LLB, MBA

B Sc, MBA

CA(SA), HDip BDP, MBA

MEETINgS hELD DuRINg  
2011 FINANCIAL YEAR

MEETINgS ATTENDED DuRINg 
2011 FINANCIAL YEAR

5

5

5

5

4

5

The function of the Audit Risk & Compliance Committee is to advise on the establishment and maintenance of a framework of internal control, effective 
management of financial and other risks, compliance with laws and regulations and appropriate ethical standards for the management of the Company. 
It also gives the Board additional assurance regarding the quality and reliability of financial information prepared for use by the Board in determining 
policies or for inclusion in the financial statements. In accordance with the Principles, the Committee consists only of Independent Directors and is 
chaired by an Independent Director who is not the Chairman of the Board.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 37

COMMITTEE CHARTER
The Committee’s Charter, which is summarised below, sets out the specific responsibilities delegated to it by the Board and details the manner in which 
the Committee will operate. The Charter can be found on the Company’s website www.metcash.com under the heading ‘Corporate Governance’.

The principal terms of reference of the Audit Risk & Compliance Committee are the effective management of financial and other risks through ensuring 
that systems and management processes are in place to identify and manage operational, financial and compliance risks.

Specific areas of review include:
 ›

overseeing the establishment of a framework within which risks to the Company are identified and mitigated and risk avoidance processes are 
established and the effectiveness of the risk management process monitored;
financial risk and exposure;
occupational health and safety;
environmental issues;
Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Points (HACCP) based food safety program; and
integrity of information technology systems.

 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›

The Committee reviews the effectiveness of risk management policies and procedures by:
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›

reviewing monthly financial performance against budget and updated forecasts at least quarterly;
reviewing the internal audit of the Group’s financial controls, taxation compliance and adherence to policies and regulations;
reviewing annually the effectiveness and adequacy of the Group’s insurance program;
the provision of reliable management and financial reporting — this is done by reviewing and assessing the:
 — quality and timing of management reporting to the Board to enable internal and external reporting of the Company’s risks, operations and 

financial condition;

 — accounting policies and practices against generally accepted accounting principles and the requirements of the Corporations Law, Australian 

Accounting Standards and Australian Securities Exchange requirements;

 — half-yearly and annual financial statements;

 ›

 ›

assessing compliance with laws and regulations by monitoring developments and changes in the various rules, laws and regulations relating to the 
Company’s business operations and the responsibilities of Directors and reviewing the extent to which the Board and the Company are meeting 
their obligations to ensure that all requirements are met;

the maintenance of an effective and efficient audit function — this is achieved by:
 — recommending to the Board the appointment of external and internal auditors;
 — reviewing the effectiveness of the external and internal audit functions;
 — ensuring audit scopes are adequate and cover areas of anticipated risk;
 — reviewing audit findings and management response;
 — reviewing the independence of the external auditor;
 — ensuring auditors have the necessary access to Company information and staff to fulfil their obligations.

The Audit Risk & Compliance Committee acts to ensure that operational, financial and compliance risks are managed in accordance with the 
Board’s risk tolerance. The Company has implemented a Risk Management Framework which is supported by specialised risk management teams 
(refer Principle 7 – Recognise and Manage Risk). The Committee has obtained assurance regarding the effectiveness of the overall system of risk 
management through various means. These means have included direct enquiry of management, internal and external audit reports and the monitoring 
of financial and operational results. The Committee meets regularly, in private, with the Lead External Audit Partner and the Chief Audit Executive.

A ‘Charter of Audit Independence’ is in place that details the circumstances in which the Company’s external auditor may perform non-audit related 
services and the procedures to be followed to obtain approval for those services where they are permitted. The ‘Charter’ also contains the Company’s 
policies on the hiring of former partners and senior managers of the external auditor and the rotation of lead and review external audit engagement 
partners. The Charter can be found on the Company’s website www.metcash.com under the heading ‘Corporate Governance’. 

In principle, the appointment of an external auditor would be based on a tender process conducted by the Audit Risk & Compliance Committee. The 
Committee would select suitable candidates for the role, issue and evaluate tenders, interview the candidates and then make a recommendation to 
the Board.

PRINCIPLE 5 – MAKE TIMELY AND BALANCED DISCLOSURE

COMPLIANCE WITH ASX LISTING RULE DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS
The Metcash Market Disclosure Policy is designed to ensure that:
 ›

there is full and timely disclosure of the Company’s activities to shareholders and the market, in accordance with the Company’s legal and regulatory 
obligations; and
all stakeholders (including shareholders, the market and other interested parties) have an equal opportunity to receive and obtain externally available 
information issued by the Company.

 ›

The policy reflects the Company’s obligation to comply with the disclosure requirements of the Listing Rules of the Australian Securities Exchange (ASX), 
as well as relevant corporations and securities legislation.

The policy is reviewed regularly to ensure that the policy reflects any legislative or regulatory requirements or ‘best practice’ developments.

38 C O R P O R A T E   G O V E R N A N C E   S T A T E M E N T  C O N T I N U E D

DISCLOSURE RESPONSIBILITIES AND PROCEDURES
The Company has designated the Chairman, Chief Executive Officer and Company Secretary as ‘Disclosure Officers’. The Chairman’s approval, or 
that of his delegate, is required for disclosures. The Company Secretary has responsibility for liaising with the ASX in relation to all announcement and 
disclosure issues.

Disclosure Officers have responsibility for reviewing proposed disclosures and making decisions in relation to what information can or should be 
disclosed to the market.

All Metcash staff are required to inform a Disclosure Officer of any potential ‘price sensitive’ information concerning the Company as soon as they 
become aware of it. Staff may speak to their Business Pillar Head or a Disclosure Officer if they are in doubt as to whether information is potentially 
‘price sensitive’.

The Market Disclosure Policy can be found on the Company’s website www.metcash.com under the heading ‘Corporate Governance’.

PRINCIPLE 6: RESPECT THE RIGHTS OF SHAREHOLDERS
The Company believes that shareholder and market confidence in all its dealings is paramount and is committed to ensuring it complies with continuous 
disclosure obligations so that its investors have timely and equal access to important company information. 

Information provided to the ASX is made available on the Company’s website so that all shareholders and other key stakeholders have timely access 
to it. 

In addition to meeting its continuous disclosure obligations, Metcash ensures shareholders and the broader investment community have timely access 
to important company information through a series of regular disclosure events during the financial year. The calendar for these events is posted on the 
company’s website.

The Shareholder Communication Policy can be found on the Company’s website www.metcash.com under the heading ‘Corporate Governance’.

The Company continues to encourage electronic communication with shareholders to facilitate the speedy and inexpensive dissemination of information. 
This is being done through a program to obtain and update shareholder email addresses, to alert them to new information on the Metcash website and 
to distribute information to them directly. The Company’s website contains more than five years of ASX and media announcements and annual reports. 
This information is shown under the heading ‘Investor Centre’. Provision has also been made for electronic proxy voting.

The Board encourages full participation of shareholders at the Annual General Meeting to ensure a high level of accountability and discussion of the 
Company’s strategy and goals. The external auditor attends the Annual General Meeting to answer shareholder questions about the conduct of the 
audit and the preparation and content of the Auditor’s Report.

PRINCIPLE 7: RECOGNISE AND MANAGE RISK

POLICES FOR THE OVERSIGHT AND MANAGEMENT OF MATERIAL BUSINESS RISKS. 
The Board is responsible for designing and reviewing Metcash’s Risk Management Policy and for determining the Company’s appetite for risk, taking 
into account the Company’s strategic objectives and other factors including stakeholder expectations. The level of tolerance for risk varies according to 
the risk area.

The Metcash Group Risk Department, the Internal Audit Department and the Audit Risk & Compliance Committee (AR&CC), a committee of the Board, 
implement a continuous process of communication with internal stakeholders at each stage of the risk management process. They also conduct annual 
examinations of Metcash’s external and internal environments, so as to establish the parameters within which risks must be managed.

Policies on risk oversight and management of material business risks are summarised in a document entitled ‘Risk Management Policy – Summary’ 
which can be found on the Metcash website www.metcash.com under the heading ‘Corporate Governance’.

The Company’s risk management philosophy and practices are documented more fully in the Metcash Risk Management Framework and Guidelines 
(Risk Management Framework).

The Company has adopted the Australian/New Zealand Standard for Risk Management — AS/NZ 4360:2004 (currently being aligned to ISO 
31000:2009) as the basis for its Risk Management Framework. Metcash has implemented its Risk Management Framework through, amongst 
other things, the identification of material business risk categories and the development of risk profiles for all the major segments and functions of 
the business. 

Asset Management;
Business Continuity;
Health, Safety, Environment, Community (HSEC);
Compliance and Legal (Non-HSEC);
Employee;
Financial Reporting;
Criminal Activity;
Information Technology;
Reputational;
Solvency;
Operations/Warehouse;

Material business risks that have been identified and included in the Risk Management Framework are grouped under the following categories:
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 › Merchandising, Customer and Supplier (i.e. Supply chain); and
 ›

Strategic/Sustainability.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 39

The risk management process includes the following elements:
 ›

Risk assessment;
 — risk identification;
 — risk analysis;
 — risk treatment;

 › Monitoring and review; and
 ›

Recording the risk management process.

Roles and responsibilities
In addition to the specific responsibilities and reporting roles of the Metcash Group Risk Department and Internal Audit Department, the Metcash 
Executive Team is regularly required to report to the Board as to the emergence of any significant risk issues and the management of previously reported 
material risk issues. 

The Audit Risk & Compliance Committee (AR&CC) is responsible for monitoring management’s risk processes other than corporate strategy, the 
oversight of which is a Board responsibility. On behalf of the Board, the AR&CC monitors those risk events that could prevent the achievement of the 
Company’s corporate strategies. 

All Metcash employees are responsible for the management of risk within their areas. Management is responsible for assessing and monitoring risk 
and designing cost-effective mitigation to facilitate the achievement of goals and objectives. Non-management employees are always responsible for 
ensuring that risk controls within their scope of responsibility operate effectively. These employees are also required to advise management of increasing 
or new risk exposures and significant operational incidents as they become aware of them. 

This ‘front line’ of risk management is supported by specialised risk management teams covering specific areas of risk within Metcash and by 
independent reviews conducted by the Metcash Internal Audit Department to verify the adequacy and effectiveness of risk management.

THE BOARD SHOULD REQUIRE MANAGEMENT TO DESIGN AND IMPLEMENT THE RISK MANAGEMENT AND INTERNAL 
CONTROL SYSTEM TO MANAGE THE COMPANY’S MATERIAL BUSINESS RISKS AND REPORT TO IT ON WHETHER THOSE 
RISKS ARE BEING MANAGED EFFECTIVELY
Metcash implements a risk oversight and risk management process that is based on Risk Management Standard AUS/NZ 4360 (currently being aligned 
to ISO 31000:2009). This system is used to profile all potential risks by identifying, prioritising and managing such risks across the Company. 

Management has reported to the Board as to the effectiveness of the Company’s management of its material business risks using this internal system.

The Risk Management Policy and Risk Management Framework utilised at Metcash cover a wide range of activities and are used to identify, analyse, 
evaluate, manage and monitor risks across all areas of the business. Risk profiles are fully in place for existing sites, and are implemented at newly 
acquired sites. These are prepared in consultation with senior management, agreed with site business management and are periodically reviewed and 
updated by risk team members. Ongoing risk management activities include: 
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›

confirmation of key controls; 
reporting of incidents: recording and monitoring of key risk indicators (monitoring of residual risk levels);
follow-up on risk treatment/action plans;
escalation of issues; and 
regular reporting processes to all levels of management. 

The ongoing process of communication, consultation, monitoring and review enables management to demonstrate continuous improvement whilst 
encouraging greater ownership by individuals across the business. 

The risk management and internal control system provides regular feedback to management on their effectiveness in managing business risks. This is 
supported by the Risk Management platform database (software) which holds the risk controls library, all risk categories & events, risk profiles for each 
pillar/business, business/functional objectives, critical success factors, processes, compliance data, incidents and corrective actions.

The Risk Management Policy and Risk Management Framework documents form an integral part of Company’s risk management. The Board continues 
to review these and provide support in defining clear accountabilities, responsibilities and embedding Enterprise Risk Management in planning, strategy 
and company culture. The Board and the AR&RC remain responsible for the oversight of the risk management process.

Management has reported to the Board as to the effectiveness of the Company’s management of its material risks. 

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER AND CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER DECLARATION
The Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer provided a declaration in writing to the Board in accordance with section 295A of the 
Corporations Act that, among other things, the Company’s financial reports present a true and fair view, in all material respects, of the Company’s 
financial condition and operational results and are in accordance with relevant accounting standards (refer to the Directors’ Report). 

The Board has received written assurance from the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer that the declaration provided by them in 
accordance with section 295A of the Corporations Act (refer to the Directors’ Report) is founded on a sound system of risk management and internal 
compliance and control and that the system is operating effectively in all material respects in relation to financial reporting risks.

40

PRINCIPLE 8: REMUNERATE FAIRLY AND RESPONSIBLY

THE BOARD SHOULD ESTABLISH A REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
The Board has established a Remuneration and Nomination Committee. For details of the Committee’s membership, their attendance at Committee 
meetings and a summary of the Committee’s Charter, please refer to Principle 2 — ‘The Board should establish a Nomination Committee’.

Remuneration Policy
The Company’s Remuneration Policy can be found on the Metcash website www.metcash.com under the heading of ‘Corporate Governance’. It is 
summarised in the ‘Remuneration Report’ contained within the Directors’ Report. Details of the compensation of senior executives are also contained in 
the Directors’ Report.

The Company’s policy on prohibiting entering into transactions in associated products which limit the economic risk of participating in unvested 
entitlements under any equity-based remuneration schemes is set out in the Metcash Code for Directors and Executives in Respect of Share 
Transactions which can be found on the Company’s website www.metcash.com.

Non-executive Directors’ compensation and retirement benefits
Refer to the ‘Remuneration Report’ contained within the Directors’ Report.

Termination entitlements of CEO and senior executives
Refer to the ‘Remuneration Report’ contained within the Directors’ Report.

ADDITIONAL FINANCIAL INFORMATION

The following ‘Like for Like’ and ‘Underlying’ analyses are presented to explain the Group’s performance excluding the effects of material changes in 
business structure and excluding non-recurring items and certain intangible amortisation respectively. The ‘Like for Like’ and ‘Underlying’ results are not 
the statutory results of the Group. The ‘Reported’ or statutory results are presented in the attached financial statements from page 56.

‘Like for Like’ – Sales Revenue

Group Sales Revenue 

Less:

Loss of ALH Volume 

Campbells Wholesale Branch Closures 

  Mitre 10 Acquisition 

‘Like for Like’ Sales Revenue 

‘Like for Like’ – EBITA

Group EBITA 

Less:

Loss of ALH Volume 

  Mitre 10 Acquisition 

‘Like for Like’ EBITA 

‘Underlying’ – Profit and EPS

‘Reported’ Profit after Tax 

Add back:

Amortisation of Customer Relationships and Licence Agreements 

Significant Items after Tax 

‘Underlying’ Profit after Tax 

Earnings per Share (basic) (cps)

‘Reported’ 

‘Underlying’ 

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

12,364.0 

11,517.4

(41.3) 

– 

(797.6) 

(444.7)

(51.7)

(61.6)

11,525.1 

10,959.4

438.0 

401.2

– 

(20.7) 

417.3 

(11.1)

(1.5)

388.6

241.4 

227.6

7.9 

6.9 

256.2 

31.5 

33.4 

6.5

10.8

244.9

29.7

32.0

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL REPORT CONTENTs

DIRECTORS’ REPORT

STATEMENT of COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

STATEMENT of FINANCIAL POSITION

STATEMENT of CHANGES IN EQUITY

STATEMENT of CASH FLOWS

NoTES To ThE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1  CORPORATE INFORMATION

2  SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

3  SEGMENT INFORMATION

4  REVENUE AND EXPENSES

5 

INCOME TAX

6  DIVIDENDS PAID AND PROPOSED

7  CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

8  TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES (CURRENT)

9 

INVENTORIES

10  DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

11  RECEIVABLES (NON-CURRENT)

12  INVESTMENTS IN ASSOCIATES

13  INFORMATION RELATING TO METCASH LIMITED (THE PARENT ENTITY)

14  OTHER FINANCIAL ASSETS (NON-CURRENT)

15  PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

16  INTANGIBLE ASSETS AND GOODWILL

17  SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS

18  TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES (CURRENT)

19  INTEREST BEARING LOANS AND BORROWINGS

20  DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

21  PROVISIONS

22  OTHER FINANCIAL LIABILITIES

23  CONTRIBUTED EQUITY AND RESERVES

24  FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES AND POLICIES

25  COMMITMENTS

26  RELATED PARTY DISCLOSURE

27  DIRECTORS’ AND EXECUTIVES’ DISCLOSURES

28  AUDITORS REMUNERATION

29  BUSINESS COMBINATIONS

30  EARNINGS PER SHARE

31  CONTINGENT LIABILITIES

32  SUBSEQUENT EVENTS

DIRECTORS’ dEclArATioN

AUDITOR’S iNdEpENdENcE dEclArATioN

INDEPENDENT AudiTor’S rEporT

ASX AddiTioNAl iNforMATioN

CORPORATE INFORMATION

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 41

42

56

57

58

59

60

60

60

65

66

67

68

68

69

70

70

70

71

72

72

72

73

75

77

77

77

78

78

79

80

83

84

89

92

93

95

95

95

96

97

98

100

101

42

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

Year ended 30 April 2011

Your Directors submit their report for the year ended 30 April 2011

DIRECTORS
The names and details of the Company’s Directors in office during the financial year are as follows:

Carlos S dos Santos (retired as Chairman on 2 September 2010)
Peter L Barnes (Chairman)
Andrew Reitzer (CEO)
Fiona E Balfour (appointed 16 November 2010)
Michael R Butler
Neil D Hamilton
Michael R Jablonski (retired 2 September 2010)
Edwin M Jankelowitz
Richard A Longes
V Dudley Rubin

Directors were in office for this entire period unless otherwise stated.

For qualifications and experience of Directors please refer to the Board of Directors section of this annual report.

COMPANY SECRETARY
Greg Watson (appointed 24 December 2010)
John Randall (retired 24 December 2010)

For qualifications and experience of the Company Secretary please refer to the Board of Directors section of this annual report.

INTERESTS IN THE SHARES AND OPTIONS OF THE COMPANY AND RELATED BODIES CORPORATE
As at the date of this report, the interests of the Directors in the shares and options of Metcash Limited were:

Number of  
ordiNary shares

Number of optioNs  
over ordiNary shares

Peter L Barnes 

Andrew Reitzer 

Fiona E Balfour 

Michael R Butler 

Neil D Hamilton 

Edwin M Jankelowitz  

Richard A Longes 

V Dudley Rubin 

177,083 

1,750,000 

13,600 

50,000 

20,000 

320,000 

128,154 

15,000 

*  Final 20% of the options granted in 2005 failed to meet the performance hurdle and did not vest. Options will be cancelled from the register on 

2 September 2011

EARNINGS PER SHARE

Basic earnings per share  

Diluted earnings per share  

DIVIDENDS ON ORDINARY SHARES

Final dividend for 2011 recommended 

Dividends paid in the year:

Interim for the 2011 year — paid in December 2010 

Final for the 2010 year recommended in the 2010 financial report 

Total dividends paid in the year 

Total 2011 dividends declared per share 

ceNts

16.0 

11.0 

15.0 

27.0

—

 1,200,000 *

—

—

—

130,000 *

—

—

ceNts

31.46

31.41

$’m

123.0

84.6

114.8

199.4

 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 43

CORPORATE INFORMATION

Corporate structure
The principal activities of the Group during the year were the wholesale distribution and marketing of groceries, liquor, hardware and associated products.

REVIEW AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

Group overview
A review of the operations during the period and the results of those operations, appears in the ‘Chairman’s and CEO’s report on page 4.

Summarised operating results are as follows:

Business segments

Food Distribution 

Cash & Carry Distribution 

Liquor Distribution 

Hardware Distribution 

Group adjustments/(unallocated amounts) 

Group revenues and profit from continuing operations before income tax expense 

2011

reveNues 
$’m

7,559.9 

1,709.9 

2,296.6 

797.6 

12,364.0 

97.6 

12,461.6 

profit  
before tax 
$’m

361.8

31.8

30.1

20.7

444.4

(87.5)

356.9

SIGNIFICANT CHANGES IN THE STATE OF AFFAIRS
No significant changes in the state of affairs of the Group occurred during the financial period, not otherwise disclosed in the ‘Chairman’s and 
CEO’s report’.

SIGNIFICANT EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE DATE
There have been no significant events subsequent to balance date.

LIKELY DEVELOPMENTS AND EXPECTED RESULTS
Information with respect to likely developments is set out within the ‘Chairman’s and CEO’s report’.

DIRECTORS’ MEETINGS
The number of meetings of Directors (including meetings of committees of Directors) held during the year and the number of meetings attended by each 
of the Directors were as follows:

MEETINgS OF COMMITTEES

directors’  
meetiNgs

remuNeratioN  
& NomiNatioN

audit risk  
& compliaNce

Number of meetings held: 

Number of meetings attended:

Carlos S dos Santos (i) 

Peter L Barnes 

Andrew Reitzer 

Fiona E Balfour (ii) 

Michael R Butler 

Neil D Hamilton  

Michael R Jablonski (i) 

Edwin M Jankelowitz (iii) 

Richard A Longes 

V Dudley Rubin 

10 

4 

10 

10 

6 

8 

9 

4 

10 

9 

10 

4 

2 

4 

— 

2 

— 

4 

— 

— 

— 

— 

5

—

—

—

—

4

—

—

—

5

5

(i)   Mr dos Santos and Mr Jablonski retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010.
(ii)   Mrs Balfour was appointed to the Metcash Board on 16 November 2010.
(iii)  Mr Jankelowitz became a non-executive director on 1 April 2011.

All Directors were eligible to attend all meetings held except for Mr dos Santos, who was eligible to attend 4 Directors’ meetings, Mr Jablonski who was 
eligible to attend 4 Directors’ meetings and Mrs Balfour who was eligible to attend 6 Directors’ meetings.

 
  
 
 
44 D I R E C T O R S ’   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

Committee membership
As at the date of this report, the Company had an Audit Risk & Compliance Committee and a Remuneration & Nomination Committee.

Members acting on the committees of the Board during the year were:

 audit risk & compliaNce

remuNeratioN & NomiNatioN

R A Longes (c) 

M R Butler 

V Dudley Rubin 

P L Barnes *

C S dos Santos*

N D Hamilton (c)*

F E Balfour

(c)  Denotes the chairman of the committee.
*  Mr dos Santos was a member of the Remuneration & Nomination Committee until his retirement on 2 September 2010. Mr Hamilton was appointed 
on 1 September 2010 as chairman of the Remuneration & Nomination Committee upon Mr Barnes being appointed chairman of the Metcash Board 
on 2 September 2010.

For details of the committees, their charters and current membership, please refer to the section ‘Corporate Governance Statement’.

Indemnification and insurance of directors and officers
(i)   The Constitution of the Company permits the grant of an indemnity (to the maximum extent permitted by law) in favour of each Director, the 

Company Secretary, past Directors and Secretaries, and all past and present Executive Officers. The Company has entered into Deeds of 
Indemnity and Access with F J Conroy, C P Curran, T S Haggai, R S Allan, J J David, Sir Leo Hielscher, B A Hogan, M Wesslink, Joao Louis Jardim 
(Lou Jardin), C dos Santos and M Jablonski together with all of the current Directors and certain other officers of the Company. This indemnity is 
against any liability to third parties (other than related Metcash companies), by such officers unless the liability arises out of conduct involving a 
lack of good faith. The indemnity also includes costs or expenses incurred by an officer in unsuccessfully defending proceedings relating to that 
person’s position.

(ii)   During the financial year, the Company has paid, or agreed to pay, a premium in respect of a contract of insurance insuring officers (and any 

persons who are officers in the future) against certain liabilities incurred in that capacity. Disclosure of the total amount of the premiums and the 
nature of the liabilities in respect of such insurance is prohibited by the contract of insurance.

SHAREHOLDER RETURNS
The ongoing performance of the Group has ensured that returns to shareholders, through both dividends and capital growth, has continued.

Earnings per share before non-recurring items (cents) 

Basic earnings per share (cents) 

Dividends declared per share (cents) 

Dividend payout ratio on basic earnings per share (%) 

Return on equity (%) 

Share price (30 April) ($) 

Dividend yield (%) 

YEAR ENDED 30 APRIL

2011

32.4  

 31.5  

 27.0  

 85.8  

17.2  

 4.08  

 6.6  

2010

 31.2  

 29.7  

 26.0  

 87.4  

 17.3  

 4.15  

 6.3  

2009

 28.7  

 26.5  

 24.0  

 90.7  

 17.2  

 4.12  

 5.8  

2008

 25.3  

 25.9  

 21.0  

 81.2  

 15.6  

 4.22  

 5.0  

2007

 21.8

 21.1

 17.0

 80.6

 14.2

 5.24

 3.2

ROUNDING
The amounts contained in this report and in the financial report have been rounded to the nearest $100,000 (where rounding is applicable) under the 
option available to the Company under Australian Securities and Investments Commission (ASIC) Class Order 98/0100. The Company is an entity to 
which the Class Order applies.

TAX CONSOLIDATION
Metcash Limited has formed a tax consolidated group including its 100% owned Australian subsidiaries. Members of the group have entered into a 
tax sharing arrangement in order to allocate income tax expense to the wholly owned subsidiaries on a modified stand-alone basis. In addition, the 
agreement provides for the allocation of income tax liabilities between the entities should the head entity default on its tax payment obligations.

 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 45

REMUNERATION REPORT (AUDITED)

Executive Summary
Metcash is the “third force” in the grocery and liquor industries. Its efforts are concentrated in the supply (supply chain and logistics), marketing, 
promotion and retailing of goods through its network of Independent Retailers.

As such Metcash competes directly and through the Independent sector with the with self supplied chains and all other “non independent” organisations 
in these sectors.

The competition Metcash faces is not restricted to those factors outlined above. On a daily basis each of the competitors seeks to enhance their 
advantage through the attraction, retention and development of high calibre people charged with decision making and successful implementation of 
various strategies to maximise their shareholders’ investment.

For Metcash this is a “war for talent” and as such the competition for high calibre people is as intense as the drive for profitability. This requires Metcash 
to provide financial incentives within a limited market to attract and retain the best qualified people to be able to deliver on its strategies.

Metcash has been able to differentiate itself from its other competitors, in relation to remuneration, by paying base salaries at a level sufficient to remain 
market competitive but then to place a significant proportion of total remuneration “at risk”. This is achieved by providing short and long term incentives 
designed to extract superior performance which in turn drives profitability and enhances shareholder value.

This report outlines the remuneration arrangements for Directors and Executives of Metcash Limited (the Company).

Remuneration and Nomination Committee

Role
The Remuneration and Nomination Committee of the Board of Directors is responsible for determining and reviewing compensation arrangements for 
the Directors, the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and the Senior Executive team.

The principal responsibilities of the Committee (which are available on the Company’s website) are to:
 ›

review and advise the Board annually on the remuneration and components of remuneration for the Chief Executive Officer and Executives reporting 
directly to the Chief Executive Officer;
review management recommendations and advise the Board on performance linked compensation packages for management staff, Directors’ and 
Executives’ retirement, pension and superannuation schemes, and employee participation schemes, including executive share and share option 
plans and employee share plans;
administer the Metcash Employees Option Plan, the Metcash Performance Rights Plan and exercise the Board’s discretionary power when required;
advise the Board on directorship appointments, and implement processes to assess the Board and its committees, review the Board’s required 
status, experience, mix of skills, and other qualities, including gender, and provide a Directors’ orientation and education program;
annually evaluate and advise the Board on the performance of the Chief Executive Officer;
advise the Board on the successor to the Chief Executive Officer; and
assess the effectiveness of the Board as a whole and its committees as set out in Section 7 of the Metcash Board Charter.

 ›

 ›
 ›

 ›
 ›
 ›

The Remuneration and Nomination Committee assesses the appropriateness of the nature and amount of remuneration of Directors and Senior 
Executives on a periodic basis by reference to relevant employment market conditions with the overall objective of ensuring maximum stakeholder 
benefit from the retention of a high quality Board and Executive team.

Compensation structure
In accordance with best practice corporate governance, the structure of Non-executive Director and Senior Executive remuneration is separate and distinct.

Non-executive Director compensation
Aggregate Non-executive Directors’ remuneration is determined from time to time by members at a general meeting. The current limit, $1,300,000, was 
agreed by members at the 2 September 2010 Annual General Meeting.

Non-executive Directors are paid an annual fee which is periodically reviewed. The Remuneration and Nomination Committee has responsibility for 
reviewing and recommending the level of remuneration for Non-executive Directors. External professional advice is sought before any changes are 
made to the amount paid to Directors within the overall maximum amount approved by shareholders. Directors performing committee duties are paid 
additional fees. The current fees were based on independent advice and are:

Chairman 

Chairman Remuneration and Nomination Committee 

Chairman, Audit Risk and Compliance Committee 

Directors (3) 

Directors (1) 

base fee

chair fee

committee fee

superaNNuatioN

total

$115,000 

$115,000 

$115,000 

$345,000 

$115,000 

$172,500 

$11,500 

$23,000 

$28,000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

$34,500 

— 

$15,199 

$12,420 

$12,870 

$34,155 

$10,350 

$314,199

150,420

155,870

$413,655

$125,350

$805,000 

$223,500 

$46,000 

$84,994 

$1,159,494

Non-executive Directors do not receive bonuses and are not entitled to participate in any of the Company’s short or long term incentive schemes. The 
Options held by E M Jankelowitz are for past service as an Executive Director. No new options will be issued.

A retirement benefit was paid to Non-executive Directors for past service. The benefits were in accordance with Section 8.3(g) and (h) of the Company’s 
Constitution and Section 200 of the Corporations Law.

The retirement benefit scheme was discontinued as at the date of the 2005 Annual General Meeting and accrued benefits (as shown below) were frozen 
at that time. Directors’ fees were increased at the time, based on independent advice to reflect the cessation of this benefit.

 
46 D I R E C T O R S ’   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

 accrued beNefits

R A Longes 

P L Barnes 

$

211,619

211,619

423,238

Senior Executive and Executive Director compensation
It is the policy of Metcash to remunerate employees in appropriate ways that recognise the market value of individual skills, the need to attract 
and retain essential key skills for the growth and development of the company and to provide sufficient incentive to ensure alignment with 
shareholder expectations.

The Board and the Remuneration and Nomination Committee recognises that the Group operates in a very competitive environment and that 
its performance depends on the quality of its people. To continue to prosper, the Group must be able to attract, motivate and retain highly 
skilled executives.

The guiding principles of the Group’s remuneration policy are to:
 ›
 ›

provide competitive rewards to attract and retain executive talent;
select Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) and performance hurdles that will encourage results across the Group and have a significant portion of 
total reward “at risk”;
link rewards to executives to the creation of value to shareholders;
assess and reward executives using financial and non-financial measures of performance;
ensure remuneration arrangements between executives are equitable and facilitate the deployment of human resources around the Group; and
limit severance payments on termination to pre-established contractual arrangements that do not commit the Group to making unjustified payments 
in the event of non-performance.

 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›

Advisers
The Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Human Resources Officer have assisted the Remuneration and Nominations Committee in its deliberations 
during the year. In addition, independent advisers were retained to provide assistance and advice on market-related remuneration and short, medium 
and long-term incentives.

Service contracts
Service contracts exist for Senior Executives including the Chief Executive Officer. They are unlimited in term but capable of termination on 15 months’ 
notice in the case of the Chief Executive Officer and nine months’ notice in the case of Executives who are direct reports to the Chief Executive Officer. 
The Group retains the right to terminate a contract immediately, by making payments equal to the notice period, in lieu of notice. In addition, should 
termination be as a result of redundancy, a further payment of nine months of fixed remuneration (base salary plus superannuation) is payable to the 
Chief Executive Officer and six months’ further payment to Executives who are direct reports to the Chief Executive Officer.

The Chief Executive Officer and Executives, who are direct reports to the Chief Executive Officer, may terminate their employment by giving three 
months’ notice.

The service contracts typically outline the components of remuneration paid to Executives, but do not prescribe how remuneration levels are reviewed 
each year to take account of cost-of-living changes, any change in the scope of the role performed by the Executive and any changes required to meet 
the principles of the remuneration policy.

New service contracts entered into post the Productivity Commission’s Report on Executive Remuneration 2010, contain similar elements to other 
executives’ service contracts and comply with the Federal Government’s law on executive contracts limiting any termination payments to a maximum 
amount of twelve months of base salary.

Executives who resign or whose employment is terminated for cause and whose short term or long term incentives are unvested at the time, forfeit their 
entitlements to those unvested incentives. Executives who are retrenched or who retire from full time work before vesting of short or long term incentives 
or who die whilst employed by the Company, may be allowed (or their Estate may be allowed) to keep all or part of those unvested incentives, at the 
discretion of the Board.

In some circumstances surrounding termination of employment, the company may require individuals to enter into non-compete arrangements with 
the company, to protect the company’s rights. These non compete arrangements may require a payment to the individual in consideration of these 
arrangements.

Remuneration
Remuneration is divided into two components. The first is the fixed or base component, which is made up of base salary and superannuation benefits 
of Total Employment Cost (TEC). The second is the ‘at risk’ component, which is subject to KPIs and performance hurdles and is generally made up 
of short and long-term incentives that take the form of cash payments and/or participation in the equity plans. The amount of ‘at risk’ remuneration, 
if any, that is earned by an Executive is wholly dependent on that Executive’s and the Group’s performance against those pre-determined KPIs and 
performance hurdles.

Fixed remuneration

Base salary and benefits
Base salaries are determined by reference to the scope and nature of the individual’s role and their performance and experience. Market data is used 
to benchmark salary levels. Particular consideration is given to competitive remuneration levels and the need to retain talent.

Superannuation benefits
Superannuation benefits are delivered in accordance with the Australian Government’s Superannuation Guarantee Levy.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 47

At risk remuneration
The ‘at risk’ remuneration, with the short-term focus on sales revenue and profit and the long-term award influenced by earnings per share, has 
contributed to the growth in the shareholder returns as identified in the Shareholder Returns section of the Directors’ Report.

Metcash’s policy strictly prohibits all Key Management Personnel from hedging any equity-based incentive remuneration.

Short-term incentives (STI)
Within the Group each Business Pillar and the Corporate Team have separate STI schemes, designed to align each executive’s incentives to the financial 
objectives of the pillar or team concerned and which aggregate to overall group objectives. Two KPIs are utilised, being — sales revenue and profit. 
From this a matrix is formed to measure performance, usually with the previous year’s sales revenue and profit results as the origin or zero point. The 
targets vary from business to business depending on the circumstances and objectives of each pillar. However, they are all constructed so as to provide 
a stretch to exceed sales and profit budgets.

STI’s are paid in cash, historically at six-monthly intervals with the first payment based on the first half results and the second payment based on the 
achievement for the full year less the first half payment. For the 2011 year, due to the economic volatility brought on by floods, cyclones and fire, the first 
half STI payment was deferred to the end of the year.

The STI schemes operate on the condition that they are self-liquidating. That is, that the cost of the STI has been deducted from profit earned for the 
year prior to determining the level of performance achieved.

STI eligibility criteria
The STI scheme is designed so that only those employees whose decisions and actions make a significant contribution to the achievement of the 
Company’s financial objectives are eligible to participate. The level of a participant’s STI is determined as follows:

1.  Participants eligible for STI at 75% of fixed remuneration (Executive management STI scheme) 
(Number of participants: 57)
The STI component is to a maximum of 75% of fixed remuneration and is at risk against achievement of sales revenue and Earnings Before Interest and 
Tax/ Profit After Tax (EBIT/PAT) targets. These participants have a high level/critical accountability that directly impacts on the company’s performance.

These are employees who hold a position that:
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›

operates as a member of the Metcash Executive Management Team or Pillar Executive Management Team;
has objectives that are defined in terms of group/pillar objectives;
has significant input into the group/pillar strategic plan and direction; and
has a direct impact on profitability.

2.  Participants eligible for STI at 50% fixed remuneration (Management STI scheme) (Number of participants: 124)
The STI component is to a maximum of 50% of fixed remuneration and is at risk against achievement of sales revenue and EBIT/PAT targets. These 
participants provide specialist knowledge relied upon by the Company or are a national or state member of a Pillar Executive Management Team directly 
responsible for the achievement of sales and profit targets and contribute strategically to Group and or Business Pillar objectives.

These are employees who hold a position that:
 ›
 ›
 ›

has extensive specialist technical or professional knowledge in an area of expertise;
has high level budgetary and/or strategic responsibility; and
is responsible for several related activities, i.e. a whole function.

3.  Participants eligible for STI at 25% of fixed remuneration (Metcash STI scheme) (Number of participants: 214)
The STI component is to a maximum of 25% of fixed remuneration and is at risk against achievement of sales revenue and EBIT/PAT targets. 
These participants hold positions that are generally compliance and/or process driven.

These are employees who hold a position that:
 ›
has a positive contribution to profitability;
 ›
is a specialist in a field;
has a direct impact on sales and profit; or
 ›
 › may have an element of retention or attraction.

Other incentive schemes
Metcash does not restrict stretch targets to the senior ranks of the organisation only. Its philosophy of providing incentives for superior performance 
flows through most parts of the organisation where it is appropriate and desirable to do so. To achieve this, other incentive schemes are also in 
operation. Those parts of the organisation include warehouse supervisors where we strive for world class efficiencies, re-buyers, stock controllers, 
merchandisers and other specialist key roles which are focussed on reductions in the cost of doing business and are based on achievement of internal 
KPI’s such as; reductions in cost per case, reductions in time to fill customer orders, increases in customer service levels etc.

Hurdles
Achievement of all long term incentives granted by the company are subject to hurdles being met. These hurdles have objectives that must be achieved 
on a prolonged basis — usually 3–5 years — and which directly improve the value of the Company. This is expressed as an increase in earnings per 
share. To provide an accurate and consistent basis of measuring this growth in value, a calculation is used to determine “underlying” earnings per share. 
This is defined as reported earnings per share excluding amortisation and non-recurring items and best reflect the underlying ongoing profitability of 
the Company.

Use of derivatives over unvested Metcash securities
For information on the Company’s policy, please refer to ‘Principle 3 – Promote Ethical and Responsible Decision Making’ in the Corporate Governance 
Statement contained earlier in this annual report.

48 D I R E C T O R S ’   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

Long term retention plan (the Plan)
The objective of the Plan is to ensure the retention by the Company of key senior executives, while providing further incentives to increase total 
shareholders’ return.

At the time these grants were made, it was considered that a cash plan would be the most appropriate kind of incentive. The reasoning behind this was 
that Share Option schemes were being questioned by many top ASX 100 Companies as the most effective incentive scheme and work on possible new 
incentive schemes to closer align management and shareholder interests, was at the time, “work in progress”. A new long term incentive scheme, The 
Metcash Performance Rights Plan, was introduced in 2010 as the Company’s long term incentive scheme.

August 2006 Grant
In August 2006, a long-term retention incentive was provided to the Chief Executive Officer, Finance Director, Group Merchandising Director, CEO of 
IGA Distribution and Chief Information Officer. This plan concluded 30th April 2010 and the audited results showed an achievement of 92.98% of target. 
In accordance with the rules of the Plan, the participants were paid a sum equal to 92.98% of the target as reported in the 2010 Annual Report.

April 2007 Grant
A further long term retention incentive of $1 million was granted to each of the Chief Executive Officer Campbell’s Wholesale, Chief Executive Officer, 
Logistics and Corporate Development, Chief Executive Officer ALM and the Chief Human Resources Officer. The vesting of these grants is subject 
to achievement of hurdles over a five-year period (a compounding 10% increase in underlying earnings per share based on 2007 earnings per share 
adjusted for material changes to the number of shares issued) and only payable:
 ›
 ›

on successful achievement of the performance hurdles described above in 2012, and
if the Executive is still employed by the Company at that time.

If the compound annual growth achieved by the Company from the base year is:
 ›
 ›
 ›

equal to or greater than the target, then the maximum amount ($1 million) will be payable;
less than 40% of the target at the end of the five-year period, no payment will be made or;
greater than or equal to 40% of the target, then the amount paid will be increased to the maximum amount on a pro rata basis.

May 2009 Grant
A long term retention payment of $1 million was granted in May 2009 to each of the Chief Executive Officer of IGA Fresh and the General Manager, 
Finance (appointed Chief Financial Officer on 17 January 2011). The vesting of the long term incentive grant is subject to achievement of the 
performance hurdles over a five year period (a compounding 8% increase in underlying earnings per share based on 2009 underlying earnings per share 
adjusted for material changes to the number of shares issued) and only payable:
 ›
 ›

on successful achievement of the performance hurdles described above in 2014 and;
if the Executive is still employed by the Company at that time and a member of the Metcash Executive Team.

If the compound annual growth achieved by the Company from the base year is;
 ›
 ›
 ›

equal to or greater than the target, then the maximum amount ($1 million) will be paid;
less than 40% of the target at the end of the five year period, no payment will be made or;
greater than or equal to 40% of the target, then the amount paid will be increased to the maximum amount on a pro rata basis.

Prior to this grant the Chief Executive Officer of IGA Fresh and the General Manager Finance (now CFO) were not previously included in the Plan, 
however they have now been included to ensure their equitable treatment in relation to other members of the Executive Team and to ensure effective 
retention arrangements are in place.

In recognition that these two Executives have the opportunity to earn benefits from the options issued to them in 2008 (see discussion under “Options” 
section below) , and as these benefits are not available to the other members of the Executive Team, in the event they have exercised any of their 
options during the period up to 30 April 2014, the amount which would otherwise have been payable to them under the Plan, as part of the long term 
incentive granted to them, will be reduced by an amount equal to the pre-tax profits in respect of exercising the options. In this case, pre-tax profit is 
calculated using the number of options exercised and the difference between the market price of the options on the day of exercise and the price at 
which the options were issued. It should be noted that options not exercised by 7 February 2014 will be cancelled. Therefore the maximum amount 
payable to these two executives under the retention plan will be $1 million less any applicable pre-tax profit earned from exercising the 2008 options.

May 2010 Grant
In May 2010 a three year retention incentive was granted to the Chief Executive Officer, commencing at the expiration of the five year retention incentive 
granted to him in August 2006.

The performance period for this grant commenced on 1 May 2010 and concludes on 30 April 2013. This grant will be subject to a growth in underlying 
earnings per share performance hurdle and tested at the end of the performance period.

A minimum payment of $3 million will be paid for the achievement of a 5% annual compounded growth in underlying earnings per share for the 
three years, based on underlying earnings for the 2010 year, and a maximum payment of $5 million for the achievement of a 10% or better growth in 
compounded underlying earnings per share over that period. Pro rata payments are to be made for achievements between 5% and 10%.

No Performance Rights or Share Options have been granted to the CEO since 2005.

Long Term Retention Grants going forward
It is anticipated that in view of the establishment of the new Performance Rights Plan (see section below), that there will not be a general requirement for 
a further long-term retention plan other than that already announced for the Chief Executive Officer and described above.

Options
Options issued to company staff other than Executive Directors, the CEO and the Executive Team do not have performance hurdles applied to them.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 49

Options issued to Executive Directors
The performance hurdle for options issued to Executive Directors in 2005, as agreed by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting held on 
1 September 2005, was that, in each of the years in which options became available for exercise, earnings per share for the financial year preceding the 
tranche exercise date must be at least equal to a 12.5% annual increase of earnings per share compounded from the 2005 earnings per share, adjusted 
for any dilution that might occur as a consequence of any alteration to the number of ordinary shares issued.

Before these options are exercised by Executive Directors, agreement is obtained from the Remuneration and Nomination Committee, which verifies that 
the hurdle has been achieved with confirmation obtained from the Company’s external auditor.

The Remuneration and Nomination Committee has reviewed the hurdles for the first two tranches (60% and 20%) of the 2005 option issue and 
concluded that, based on underlying earnings, the hurdles have been met and those options can be exercised.

The final tranche of the 2005 options (20%) failed to meet the performance hurdle and as a consequence these options did not vest and will lapse in 
September 2011.

Options Issued to the Executive Team
Options were issued in 2005 to members of the Executive Team (excluding the CEO IGA Fresh and the General Manager Finance (now CFO) who were 
not members of the Executive Team at the time). A performance hurdle applies to these options being a compounding 10% increase in underlying 
earnings per share.

The Remuneration and Nominations Committee has reviewed the hurdles for all three tranches of the 2005 options issue and concluded that the hurdles 
have been met and all of those options can be exercised. Unexercised options will lapse in September 2011.

Options Issued to Chief Executive Officer, IGA Fresh and General Manager Finance (now CFO)
Options were issued in February 2008 to the Chief Executive Officer, IGA Fresh and the General Manager, Finance (now CFO) but were not offered to 
Executive Directors and other members of the Executive Team included in the Plan. A performance hurdle applies to these options, the hurdle being a 
compounding 8% increase in underlying earnings per share based on earnings per share for the 2007 financial year is to be achieved in the financial 
year prior to the financial year in which a tranche of options becomes able to be exercised.

Before these options are exercised by these members of the Executive Team, agreement is obtained from the Remuneration and Nomination Committee 
which verifies that the hurdle has been achieved with confirmation from the Company’s external auditor.

Performance Rights
As of June 2010, Performance Rights (the Rights Plan) replaced Share Options as the Company’s long term incentive scheme. Under the Rights Plan, 
the top 60 (approximately) Metcash Executives and Senior Managers (with “direct sight” to the bottom line growth of the Company) will be offered 
Performance Rights. Hurdle rates are reviewed annually by the Board which will determine earnings per share targets for each new grant based on 
factors including business plans and strategies, analyst consensus and expectations and other financially critical matters.

The essential elements of the Rights Plan are as follows:
 ›

each Performance Right is an entitlement to receive a fully paid ordinary share in the Company on terms and conditions determined by the Board, 
including vesting conditions linked to service and performance over a 3 year period;
performance Rights are offered at no cost to the Senior Executive/Senior Manager and as such, significantly fewer Performance Rights are offered 
than was the case with options;
performance Rights are offered annually with vesting after 3 years subject to achievement of hurdle rates. For the 2011 financial year this was 
set at between 5% and 10% compound underlying earnings per share growth. (i.e. 5% underlying earnings per share growth earns 50% of the 
Performance Rights allocation and 10% underlying earnings per share growth earns 100% of the allocation). Pro rata payments are to be made 
for achievements between 5% and 10%. If the vesting conditions are satisfied, the Performance Rights vest and shares will be delivered to the 
Executive or Senior Manager;
underlying earnings per share is calculated on the company’s underlying profit, adjusted for non-recurring and significant items such as goodwill 
impairment or amortisation, or other non cash accounting items;
persons offered Performance Rights will not be offered options or any other form of long term incentive;
performance Rights do not carry voting or dividend rights, however shares allocated upon vesting of Performance Rights will carry the same rights 
as other ordinary shares;
the number of Performance Rights granted is determined by dividing the value of an Executive’s/Senior Manager’s long term incentive entitlement by 
the Company’s share price at the time of issue.

The number of Executives and Senior Managers granted Performance Rights in financial year 2011 was 59.

Employee Share Trust (EST)
In April 2010 the Board approved the establishment of an Employee Share Trust, ‘The Metcash Employee Share Trust’ (EST). The EST functions as an 
administrative vehicle through which employee options and Performance Rights (and any other form of long term incentive, other than cash incentives) 
will be issued, administered, managed and reported.

The EST is a separate entity from Metcash and has been established in conjunction with Australian Executor Trustees and is subject to the rules of the Trust.

The EST provides the following services and benefits:
 ›
 ›

establishes an “arm’s length” relationship between Metcash and the Trust for the issuance of options and Performance Rights to employees;
options and Performance Rights are held by the Trust in the name of the employee and the Trust acts in accordance with instructions from Metcash 
and the rules of the Trust;
buys shares on market or issues new shares in accordance with instructions from Metcash;
the Trust is created solely for the purposes of issuing, holding and administering Performance Rights and options for and on behalf of 
Metcash employees;
does not diminish in any way the rights and interests of the employees who hold options or Performance Rights through the Trust; and
reports on an annual basis on its activities throughout the financial year.

 ›

 ›

 ›

 ›
 ›

 ›

 ›
 ›

 ›
 ›

50 D I R E C T O R S ’   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

Company Performance
The 2011 financial year’s results showed an increase in wholesale sales over the prior year of 7.4% and an increase in EBITA before significant items 
over the prior year of 9.2%. This translates into a reported EPS of 6.1% growth over the prior year. Underlying profit after tax for the year increased 
by 4.6%.

In the same period salaries were increased by an average 2.5% and Enterprise Bargaining Agreements (EBA’s) made during the year were also held 
at 2.5% unfunded and any increase beyond that, fully funded through productivity increases.

STI’s for the same period were paid at an average of approximately 60% of maximum.

As reported earlier in this section the 3rd and final tranche of the 2005 Share Options for Executive Directors, which had a hurdle of 12.5% compound 
increase in EPS from the 2005 EPS result, failed to meet the performance hurdle and the options did not vest. The performance hurdle on the 2005 
Share Options granted to Senior Executives with a hurdle rate of 10% compound increase in EPS from the 2005 EPS result, has been met and these 
Options are now exercisable.

Details of Key Management Personnel

 directors

executives

Carlos S dos Santos (i) 

Former Non-executive Chairman 

Ken Bean 

CEO Group Logistics and Corporate Development

Peter L Barnes 

Andrew Reitzer 

Non-executive Chairman 

Fergus Collins 

CEO Australian Liquor Marketers

Chief Executive Officer 

Peter Dubbelman 

CEO Campbells Wholesale

Fiona E Balfour (ii) 

Non-executive Director 

Adrian Gratwicke (iv) 

Chief Financial Officer

Michael R Butler 

Non-executive Director 

Bernard Hale 

Chief Information Officer

Neil D Hamilton 

Non-executive Director  

Michael R Jablonski (v)  Group Merchandise Director

Edwin M Jankelowitz (iii)  Non-executive Director 

David Johnston 

Chief Human Resources Officer

Richard A Longes 

Non-executive Director 

Mark Laidlaw 

CEO Mitre 10

V Dudley Rubin 

Non-executive Director 

Silvestro Morabito 

CEO IGA Distribution

Harry Rumpler 

CEO IGA Fresh

Greg Watson (vi) 

General Counsel and Company Secretary

(i)   Mr dos Santos retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010.
(ii)   Mrs Balfour appointed to the Metcash Board on 16 November 2010.
(iii)  Mr Jankelowitz retired as Finance Director on 31 March 2011 and became a non-executive Director on 1 April 2011.
(iv)  Mr Gratwicke appointed Chief Financial Officer on 17 January 2011.
(v)   Mr Jablonski retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010 and continues in his Executive role as Group Merchandise Director.
(vi)  Mr Watson appointed General Counsel and Company Secretary on 24 December 2010.

 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 51

Compensation of Key Management Personnel
Compensation for Key Management Personnel and the five highest paid executives of the Company and the Group for the year ended 30 April 2011

ShORT-TERM 

EMPLOYMENT  LONg TERM 

bENEFITS 

PAYMENTS 

TOTAL 

POST 

TERMINATION ShARE-bASED 

TOTAL 
PERFORMANCE 
RELATED 

ShARE 
bASED 
PAYMENTS

salary  
aNd fees 
$

boNus 
$

other 
beNefits 
$

super-
aNNuatioN 
$

boNus  
aNd leave 
$

termiNatioN 
beNefits 
$

expeNse 
$

$

248,493 

— 

— 

— 

— 

11,632 

15,015 

— 

— 

1,937,856 

900,000 

3,321 

15,076  1,732,945 

Directors

C S dos Santos (i) 

190,546 

P Barnes 

A Reitzer 

F Balfour (ii) 

M Butler 

N Hamilton 

47,518 

121,917 

128,625 

— 

— 

— 

E Jankelowitz (iv) 

677,137 

306,142 

R Longes 

D Rubin 

Executives

K Bean 

S Morabito 

F Collins 

138,104 

121,917 

— 

— 

603,374 

274,140 

702,593 

325,476 

543,742 

254,172 

P Dubbelman 

541,630 

228,410 

A Gratwicke (vi) 

690,726 

295,780 

B Hale 

D Johnston 

H Rumpler 

602,248 

273,641 

471,225 

215,546 

466,478 

177,984 

M Jablonski (iii) 

691,582 

330,763 

M Laidlaw 

G Watson (v) 

509,721 

183,333 

122,754 

51,952 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

14,000 

23,000 

— 

— 

— 

27,500 

23,000 

— 

— 

4,277 

10,973 

11,576 

13,809 

12,429 

10,973 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

15,076 

213,125 

15,076 

71,182 

15,076 

211,786 

15,076 

212,790 

15,076 

258,791 

15,076 

12,376 

15,076 

209,994 

15,076 

210,102 

15,076 

15,076 

5,251 

15,277 

41,180 

5,283 

%

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

202,178 

263,508 

26,111  4,615,309 

56.18% 

— 

— 

— 

51,795 

132,890 

140,201 

— 

— 

— 

556,622 

2,829  1,556,539 

19.85% 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

150,533 

132,890 

— 

— 

25,301  1,131,016 

44.16% 

55,130  1,169,457 

32.55% 

19,214  1,057,990 

44.74% 

18,756  1,039,662 

43.01% 

64,263  1,324,636 

42.28% 

34,117 

937,458 

32.83% 

16,791 

928,632 

46.56% 

58,843 

955,983 

45.69% 

26,971  1,102,669 

32.44% 

48,073 

797,383 

29.02% 

12,928 

198,168 

32.74% 

%

0.00%

0.00%

0.57%

0.00%

0.00%

0.00%

0.18%

0.00%

0.00%

2.24%

4.71%

1.82%

1.80%

4.85%

3.64%

1.81%

6.16%

2.45%

6.03%

6.52%

9,558,186  3,817,339 

90,821 

261,771  3,194,831 

556,622 

409,327  17,888,897 

39.65% 

2.29%

(i)  Mr dos Santos retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010.
(ii)   Mrs Balfour appointed to the Metcash Board on 16 November 2010.
(iii)  Mr Jablonski retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010 and continues in his Executive role as Group Merchandise Director.
(iv)  Mr Jankelowitz retired as Finance Director on 31 March 2011 and became a non-executive Director on 1 April 2011. An amount equal to nine months salary 

has been paid to Mr Jankelowitz, following his termination as Finance Director. This amount was stipulated in his contract of appointment.

(v)   Mr Watson appointed General Counsel and Company Secretary on 24 December 2010.
(vi)  Mr Gratwicke appointed Chief Financial Officer on 17 January 2011.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
52 D I R E C T O R S ’   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

Compensation for Key Management Personnel and the five highest paid executives of the Company and the Group for the year ended 30 April 2010
ShARE 
bASED 
PAYMENTS

TOTAL 
PERFORMANCE 
RELATED 

TERMINATION ShARE-bASED 

EMPLOYMENT  LONg TERM 

ShORT-TERM 

PAYMENTS 

bENEFITS 

TOTAL 

POST 

salary  
aNd fees 
$

boNus 
$

other 
beNefits 
$

super-
aNNuatioN 
$

boNus  
aNd leave 
$

termiNatioN 
beNefits 
$

expeNse 
$

$

Directors

C S dos Santos (iv) 

272,463 

P Barnes (iv) 

177,963 

— 

— 

— 

— 

10,846 

12,931 

— 

— 

A Reitzer 

M Butler 

N Hamilton 

M Jablonski 

1,759,620 

978,526 

3,837 

14,342 

686,588 

115,500 

115,500 

— 

— 

— 

— 

10,395 

10,395 

— 

— 

674,688 

392,490 

23,000 

14,342 

273,961 

E Jankelowitz 

706,086 

396,301 

— 

14,342 

274,467 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

L Jardin (i) 

R Longes 

D Rubin 

Executives

K Bean 

131,250 

115,500 

— 

— 

577,115 

325,301 

S Morabito (ii) 

105,435 

58,208 

F Collins 

519,914 

219,350 

P Dubbelman 

517,051 

189,418 

A Gratwicke 

499,825 

280,500 

B Hale 

D Johnston 

H Rumpler 

576,038 

324,709 

450,697 

255,771 

— 

— 

— 

— 

14,000 

23,000 

— 

— 

— 

11,813 

10,395 

— 

— 

14,342 

212,035 

334 

— 

14,342 

210,841 

14,342 

211,677 

14,342 

222,808 

14,342 

271,018 

14,342 

209,196 

388,255 

226,800 

30,000 

14,342 

222,484 

— 

— 

283,309 

190,894 

76,695  3,519,608 

48.42% 

— 

— 

125,895 

125,895 

— 

— 

41,543  1,420,024 

48.85% 

41,543  1,432,739 

48.68% 

%

— 

— 

%

0.00%

0.00%

2.18%

0.00%

0.00%

2.93%

2.90%

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

143,063 

125,895 

— 

— 

0.00%

0.00%

15,541  1,144,334 

47.26% 

— 

163,977 

35.50% 

1,943 

980,390 

42.97% 

15,541 

971,029 

41.70% 

50,800  1,068,275 

49.73% 

55,171  1,241,278 

51.52% 

15,541 

945,547 

49.85% 

50,800 

932,681 

51.21% 

1.36%

0.00%

0.20%

1.60%

4.76%

4.44%

1.64%

5.45%

494,603 

287,484 

17,250 

10,756 

203,391                               31,157     1,044,641        55.35%         2.98%          

8,197,503  3,934,858 

111,087 

221,285  2,998,466 

— 

396,275  15,859,474 

45.52% 

2.50%

(i)   Mr Jardin resigned from the Metcash Board on 9 February 2010 and ceased to be a Key Management Personnel at this time. Mr Jardin served a notice period 

until 25 October 2010, receiving salary and benefits until this date.
(ii)   Mr Morabito was appointed CEO IGA distribution on 17 February 2010.
(iii)  Mr Mark Laidlaw was appointed CEO of Mitre 10 on 29 April 2010. Due to the timing of this appointment, no remuneration has been disclosed in the 2010 

period for Mr Laidlaw as he did not act as Key Management Personnel for the period. Mr Mark Burrowes, the former CEO of Mitre 10, is not considered to have 
acted as Key Management Personnel from the period of acquisition, 25 March 2010 to 29 April 2010 as he does not meet the definition of Key Management 
Personnel.

(iv)  Non executive remuneration varies from normal agreed fees due to prior year over payment of superannuation which has been corrected in the current period
(v)   Amounts disclosed as compensation under Long Term Bonus and Leave represent accruals for leave and amounts accrued over the vesting period of the long-

term retention plan.

(vi)  Post employment superannuation has been reclassified to exclude salary sacrifice superannuation payments which has been added to salary and fees, leaving 

only the superannuation guarantee contribution payment.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 53

Options exercised and share rights granted as part of remuneration for the year ended 2010 and 2011

Value of Options exercised during the year

A Reitzer 

M Jablonski 

E Jankelowitz 

K Bean 

F Collins 

P Dubbelman 

A Gratwicke 

B Hale 

D Johnston 

S Morabito 

H Rumpler 

M Laidlaw 

G Watson 

2011 
$

— 

181,932 

237,432 

— 

— 

217,960 

16,202 

— 

126,368 

4,234 

— 

— 

— 

2010 
$

—

—

—

—

—

—

1,924

669,800

—

97

—

—

—

There were no options issued to Key Management Personnel during the current year (2010: nil). Refer to Note 27 Directors’ and Executive Disclosures 
of Key Management Personnel (b) Option Holdings

Number of Performance Rights granted during the year

A Reitzer 

M Jablonski 

E Jankelowitz 

K Bean 

F Collins 

P Dubbelman 

A Gratwicke 

B Hale 

D Johnston 

S Morabito 

H Rumpler 

M Laidlaw 

G Watson 

The performance rights were granted 3 December 2010 with a fair value at grant date of $3.62.

2011 
Number

—

70,171

—

58,159

53,923

54,514

59,770

58,053

45,728

70,171

42,479

49,166

23,628

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
54 D I R E C T O R S ’   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

Details of short term incentive bonus provided for in year ended 30 April 2011

Directors

C S dos Santos (i) 

P Barnes 

A Reitzer 

F Balfour (ii) 

M Butler 

N Hamilton 

E Jankelowitz (iii) 

R Longes 

D Rubin 

Executives

K Bean 

S Morabito 

F Collins 

P Dubbelman 

A Gratwicke (iv) 

B Hale 

D Johnston 

H Rumpler 

M Jablonski (v) 

M Laidlaw 

G Watson (vi) 

poteNtial boNus 
$

boNus payable 
$

boNus forfeited 
$

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

—

1,500,000 

900,000 

600,000

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

—

—

556,622 

306,142 

250,480

— 

— 

456,901 

513,909 

423,620 

428,269 

492,968 

456,069 

359,243 

333,720 

551,271 

257,500 

86,587 

— 

— 

274,140 

325,476 

254,172 

228,410 

295,780 

273,641 

215,546 

177,984 

330,763 

183,333 

51,952 

—

—

182,761

188,433

169,448

199,859

197,188

182,428

143,697

155,736

220,508

74,167

34,635

All bonuses for the year ended 30 April 2011 were paid in June 2011.
(i)  Mr dos Santos resigned from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010.
(ii)   Mrs Balfour appointed to the Metcash Board on 16 November 2010.
(iii)  Mr Jankelowitz retired as Finance Director on 31 March 2011 and became a non-executive Director on 1 April 2011.
(iv)  Mr Gratwicke appointed Chief Financial Officer 17 January 2011.
(v)   Mr Jablonski resigned from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010 and continues in his Executive role as Group Merchandise Director.
(vi)  Mr Watson appointed General Counsel and Company Secretary 24 December 2010.

Details of short term incentive bonus provided for in year ended 30 April 2010.

Directors

C S dos Santos 

P Barnes 

A Reitzer 

M Butler 

N Hamilton 

M Jablonski 

E Jankelowitz 

L Jardin 

R Longes 

D Rubin 

Executives

K Bean 

S Morabito 

F Collins 

P Dubbelman 

A Gratwicke 

B Hale 

D Johnston 

H Rumpler  

All bonuses for the year ended 30 April 2010 were paid in June 2010.

poteNtial boNus 
$

boNus payable 
$

boNus forfeited 
$

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

—

1,334,354 

978,526 

355,828

— 

— 

535,214 

540,410 

522,698 

— 

— 

443,593 

79,327 

411,281 

415,795 

382,500 

442,785 

348,779 

324,000 

— 

— 

392,490 

396,301 

287,484 

— 

— 

325,301 

58,208 

219,350 

189,418 

280,500 

324,709 

255,771 

226,800 

—

—

142,724

144,109

235,214

—

—

118,292

21,119

191,931

226,377

102,000

118,076

93,008

97,200

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 55

SHARE OPTIONS & PERFORMANCE RIGHTS

Unissued shares
As at the date of this report, there were 23,985,713 unissued ordinary shares under option (24,126,321 at the reporting date). Refer to Note 27 of the 
financial statements for further details of the options outstanding.

As at the date of this report, there were 1,399,385 unissued ordinary shares under performance rights (1,399,385 at the reporting date). Refer to 
Note 27 of the financial statements for further details of the performance rights outstanding.

Shares issued as a result of options
During the financial year, employees and executives have exercised options to acquire 3,209,613 fully paid ordinary shares in Metcash Limited at a 
weighted average exercise price of $3.97 per share. Since the end of the financial year, a further 75,280 options have been exercised, at a weighted 
average exercise price of $3.93 per share.

CEO AND CFO DECLARATION
The Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have provided a declaration that states:

(a)  With regard to the integrity of the financial report of Metcash Limited (the Company) and the consolidated entity for the period to 30 April 2011, 

after having made appropriate enquiries, in our opinion:
(i)   The financial statements and associated notes comply with the accounting standards and regulations as required by Section 296 of the 

Corporations Act 2001;

(ii)   The financial statements and associated notes give a true and fair view of the financial position as at 30 April 2011 and performance of the 

Company and the consolidated entity for the period then ended as required by Section 297 of the Corporations Act 2001;

(iii)   As at the date of this declaration, there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Company will be able to pay its debts as and when they 

become due and payable;

(b)   With regard to the financial records and systems of risk management and internal compliance and control of Metcash Limited and the consolidated 

entity for the period ended 30 April 2011:
(i)   The financial records of the Company and the consolidated entity have been properly maintained in accordance with Section 286 of the 

Corporations Act 2001;

(ii)   The statements made in (a) and (b)(i) above are founded on a sound system of risk management and internal compliance and control which is 

operating effectively, in all material respects, in relation to financial reporting risks;

(iii)   The risk management and internal compliance and control systems of the Company and consolidated entity relating to financial reporting, 

compliance and operations objectives are operating efficiently and effectively, in all material respects. Management has reported to the Board as 
to the effectiveness of the company’s management of its material business risks.

(iv)   Subsequent to 30 April 2011, no changes or other matters have arisen that would have a material effect on the operation of risk management 

and internal control and control systems of the Company.

AUDITOR’S INDEPENDENCE DECLARATION
The auditor’s independence declaration for the year ended 30 April 2011 has been received and is included on page 97.

NON-AUDIT SERVICES
The following non-audit services were provided by the entity’s auditor, Ernst & Young. The Directors are satisfied that the provision of non-audit services 
is compatible with the general standard of independence for auditors imposed by the Corporations Act 2001. The nature and scope of each type of 
non-audit service provided means that auditor independence was not compromised.

The amount payable to Ernst & Young in tax compliance should be seen in the context of the tax audit which the company has under gone and the 
significant work which was required in responding to the Australian Taxation Office queries.

Ernst & Young received or are due to receive the following amounts for the provision of non-audit services:

Tax compliance 

Assurance-related 

Signed in accordance with a resolution of the Directors.

$1,651,971

$129,900

Andrew Reitzer 
Director

Sydney, 7 July 2011

 
 
 
 
56

STATEMENT of COMPREhENsIVE INCOME

for the Year ended 30 April 2011

Revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit 

Distribution costs 

Administrative costs 

Share of (loss)/profit of associates 

Significant Items

Franklins acquisition costs 

Restructure of Campbells Wholesale branch network 

Finance costs 

Profit from continuing operations before income tax  

Income tax expense 

Net profit for the period 

Other comprehensive income

Foreign currency translation adjustments 

Cash flow hedge adjustment 

Income tax benefit/(expense) on items of other comprehensive income 

Other comprehensive income for the period, net of tax  

Total comprehensive income for the period  

Profit for the period is attributable to:

Equity holders of the parent 

Non controlling interests 

Total comprehensive income for the period is attributable to:

Equity holders of the parent 

Non controlling interests 

Earnings per share for profit from continuing operations attributable 
to the ordinary equity holders of the company:

—  basic earnings per share (cents) 

—  diluted earnings per share (cents) 

Dividends per share (fully franked) (cents) 

The above Statement of Comprehensive Income should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

Notes

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

4(a) 

 12,461.6  

 11,608.1

 (11,186.9) 

 (10,435.3)

 1,274.7  

 1,172.8

 (423.8) 

 (407.9) 

 (1.7) 

 (6.9) 

 —  

 (77.5) 

356.9  

 (106.1) 

250.8  

(0.3) 

 —  

 0.1  

(0.2) 

 (405.8)

 (364.4)

 0.3

 —

 (15.4)

 (57.5)

 330.0

 (99.7)

 230.3

(0.6)

(0.1)

 —

(0.7)

 250.6  

 229.6

 241.4  

 9.4  

 250.8  

 241.2  

 9.4  

 250.6  

 31.46  

 31.41  

 27.00  

 227.6

 2.7

 230.3

 226.9

 2.7

 229.6

 29.74

 29.69

 26.00

12 

4(f) 

4(f) 

4(g) 

5 

30 

30 

6 

 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 57

STATEMENT of FINANCIAL POsITION

As at 30 April 2011

ASSETS

Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade and other receivables 

Inventories 

Assets held for sale  

Derivative financial instruments 

Prepayments and other  

Total current assets 

Trade and other receivables 

Investments in associates accounted for using the equity method 

Other financial assets 

Property, plant and equipment 

Net deferred tax assets 

Intangible assets and goodwill 

Total non current assets 

TOTAL ASSETS 

LIABILITIES

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables 

Interest bearing loans and borrowings 

Derivative financial instruments 

Provisions 

Income tax payable  

Other financial liabilities 

Total current liabilities 

Non current liabilities

Interest bearing loans and borrowings 

Provisions 

Other financial liabilities 

Total non current liabilities 

TOTAL LIABILITIES 

NET ASSETS 

EQUITY

Contributed equity 

Other equity 

Reserves 

Retained earnings 

Parent Interest  

Non controlling interests  

TOTAL EQUITY  

The above Statement of Financial Position should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

Notes

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

14 

15 

5 

16 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

19 

21 

22 

23 

23 

23 

23 

 152.9  

 1,007.3  

 954.9  

9.9  

 0.9  

5.8  

 210.6

 1,008.0

 747.2

 4.0

 —

 4.9

2,131.7  

1,974.7

 80.6  

 92.1  

 0.2  

 197.6  

 6.6  

 65.4

 94.8

 0.2

 194.7

 27.2

 1,291.1  

 1,282.0

1,668.2  

 1,664.3

3,799.9  

 3,639.0

 1,376.5  

 1,294.4

 8.6  

 1.4  

 73.4  

14.3  

 0.2  

 7.8

 0.6

 99.8

 45.6

 0.2

1,474.4  

1,448.4

 826.7  

 54.2  

 1.8  

882.7  

 749.4

 61.7

 1.9

 813.0

2,357.1  

 2,261.4

1,442.8  

 1,377.6

 1,904.9  

 1,892.2

(765.9) 

 28.2  

 208.0  

(765.9)

 25.8

 166.0

1,375.2  

 1,318.1

67.6  

 59.5

1,442.8  

 1,377.6

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
58

STATEMENT of ChANGEs IN EquITy

Year ended 30 April 2011

coNtributed 
eQuity 
$’m

other 
eQuity 
$’m

share-based 
paymeNts 
$’m

retaiNed 
earNiNgs 
$’m

At 1 May 2010

 1,892.2

 (765.9)

 —

 —

 19.7

 —

 166.0

 241.4

foreigN 
curreNcy 
traNslatioN 
reserve 
$’m

cash flow 
hedge 
reserve 
$’m

owNers of 
the pareNt 
$’m

NoN-
coNtrolliNg 
iNterest 
$’m

total 
eQuity 
$’m

 (6.6)

 (0.3)

 (0.1)

 1,318.1

 59.5

1,377.6

 0.1

 241.2

 9.4

 250.6

capital 
profits 
$’m

 12.8

 —

Total comprehensive 
income, net of tax

Transactions with 

owners in their 

capacity as owners:

Exercise of options

Share-based payment

Dividends paid

Total comprehensive 
income, net of tax

Transactions with 

owners in their 

capacity as owners:

Exercise of options

Non controlling 
interests on acquisition

Share-based payment

Dividends paid

 12.7

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 2.6

 —

 —

 —

 (199.4)

 —

 —

 —

At 30 April 2011

 1,904.9

 (765.9)

 22.3

 208.0

 12.8

At 1 May 2009

 1,889.7

 (765.9)

 —

 —

 17.1

 —

 129.7

 227.6

 12.8

 —

 2.5

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 2.6

 —

 —

 —

 —

 (191.3)

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 (6.9)

 (6.0)

 (0.6)

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 12.7

 2.6

 —

 —

 12.7

 2.6

 (199.4)

 (1.3)

 (200.7)

 —  1,375.2

 67.6

 1,442.8

 —  1,277.4

 (0.1)

 226.9

 2.0

 2.7

 1,279.4

 229.6

 —

 —

 —

 —

 2.5

 —

 2.6

 —

 55.1

 2.5

 55.1

—

 2.6

 (191.3)

 (0.3)

 (191.6)

At 30 April 2010

 1,892.2

 (765.9)

 19.7

 166.0

 12.8

 (6.6)

 (0.1)

 1,318.1

 59.5

 1,377.6

The above Statement of Changes in Equity should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 59

STATEMENT of CAsh FLOws

Year ended 30 April 2011

Cash flows from operating activities:

Receipts from customers 

Payments to suppliers and employees 

Dividends received 

Interest received 

Finance costs 

Income tax paid 

Goods and services tax paid 

Net cash flows from operating activities  

Cash flows from investing activities:

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment 

Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Payments for intangibles 

Proceeds from sale of retail stores 

Proceeds from loans repaid by other entities 

Loans to other entities 

Payment on acquisition of businesses 

Payment on acquisition of associates 

Net cash flows used in investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities:

Proceeds from the issue of ordinary shares 

Payment of refinancing costs 

Proceeds from borrowings – other 

Repayments of borrowings – other 

Payment of dividends on ordinary shares 

Payment of dividends to non controlling interests 

Repayment of finance lease principal 

Net cash flows used in financing activities 

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents  

Add opening cash brought forward 

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period  

The above Statement of Cash Flows should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

Notes

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

 13,222.6  

 12,440.4

 (12,772.2) 

 (11,862.7)

 1.6  

 9.7  

 (72.3) 

 (116.8) 

 (130.1) 

 142.5  

 0.9  

 (34.7) 

 (21.6) 

 —  

 15.5  

 (27.0) 

 (14.9) 

 (0.5) 

 (82.3) 

 12.7  

 (1.5) 

 500.0  

 (420.0) 

 (199.4) 

 (1.3) 

 (8.3) 

 (117.8) 

 (57.6) 

 210.6  

 (0.1) 

 152.9  

 2.0

 8.2

 (54.2)

 (101.6)

 (137.4)

 294.7

 1.2

 (39.3)

 (30.9)

 0.1

 16.6

 (21.0)

 (62.0)

 (0.9)

 (136.2)

 2.5

 (6.1)

 795.0

 (688.7)

 (191.3)

 (0.3)

 (7.5)

 (96.4)

 62.1

 148.6

 (0.1)

 210.6

7 

29 (a) 

23 

6 

7 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
60

NoTES To ThE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs

Year ended 30 April 2011

1  CORPORATE INFORMATION
The financial report of Metcash Limited (the 
Company) for the year ended 30 April 2011 
was authorised for issue in accordance with 
a resolution of the Directors on 7 July 2011.

Metcash Limited and its controlled entities 
(the Group), is a company limited by shares 
incorporated in Australia whose shares are 
publicly traded on the Australian Securities 
Exchange. The nature of the operations and 
principal activities of the Group are described 
in the Directors’ Report.

2  SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT 
ACCOUNTING POLICIES

(i)  BASIS OF ACCOUNTING
The financial report is a general purpose financial 
report that has been prepared in accordance with 
the requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 
and Australian Accounting Standards and other 
authoritative pronouncements of the Australian 
Accounting Standards Board.

The financial report has been prepared using 
the historical cost basis except for derivative 
financial instruments which have been 
measured at fair value and share rights which 
have been valued on a binomial basis.

The financial report is presented in Australian 
dollars and all values are rounded to the nearest 
$100,000 unless otherwise stated under the 
option available to the Company under ASIC 
Class Order 98/100. The Company is an entity 
to which the class order applies.

The financial statements present the results of 
the current year, which comprised the 53 week 
period that commenced on 26 April 2010 and 
ended on 1 May 2011. The prior period results 
comprise the 52 week period that commenced 
on 27 April 2009 and ended on 25 April 2010.

(ii)  STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
The financial report complies with Australian 
Accounting Standards. The financial report also 
complies with International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRS).

(a)  Changes in Accounting Policy
Since 1 May 2010, the Group has adopted a 
number of Australian Accounting Standards and 
Interpretations which are mandatory for annual 
periods beginning on or after 1 May 2010. 
Adoption of these Standards and Interpretations 
has not had any material effect on the financial 
position or performance of the Metcash group.

The main standards adopted since 
1 May 2010 were the revised AASB 3 
‘Business Combinations’, amended AASB 
127 ‘Consolidated and Separate Financial 
Statements’ and AASB 2008-3 ‘Amendments 
to Australian Accounting Standards arising 
from AASB 3 and AASB 127’. These revised 
standards introduce significant changes to 
accounting for business combinations and 
consolidation. The major impacts include 
the requirement for acquisition costs to be 

expensed at the time they are incurred; and, 
upon gaining control of an entity, revaluation 
of any pre-existing interests in that entity to 
fair value. The changes only impact business 
combination transactions which occurred on or 
after 1 May 2010.

The following amendments to standards 
have been adopted from 1 May 2010 and did 
not have a material impact on the financial 
statements for the year:
 — AASB 2008-3 – Amendments to Australian 
Accounting Standards arising from AASB 3 
and AASB 127

 — AASB 2009-4 – Amendments to Australian 
Accounting Standards arising from the 
Annual Improvements Project – AASB 
2009-7 – Amendments to Australian 
Accounting Standards arising from the 
Annual Improvements Project

 — AASB 2008-6 – Amendments to Australian 

Accounting Standards

 — AASB 2009-8 – Amendments to Australian 
Accounting Standards – Group Cash-
settled Share-based Payment Transactions

The Group has prepared the financial 
statements in compliance with recent 
amendments to the Corporation Act (2001) 
in June 2010 which remove the requirement 
for the Group to lodge parent entity financial 
statements. Parent entity financial statements 
have been replaced by the reduced parent entity 
disclosure in Note 13.

Australian Accounting Standards issued 
but not yet effective/Early adoption of 
Australian Accounting Standards
A number of new accounting standards have 
been issued but are not yet effective during 
the year ending 30 April 2011. The Group 
has not elected to early adopt any of these 
new standards or amendments in this Financial 
Report. The new standard, when applied in 
future periods, which is expected to have a 
material impact on the financial statements, 
is the following:
 — AASB 9 ‘Financial instruments: Classification 
and measurement’: This standard makes 
significant changes to the way that financial 
assets are classified for the purpose of 
determining their measurement basis and 
also to the amounts relating to fair value 
changes which are to be taken directly to 
equity. AASB 9 is mandatory for adoption 
by the Metcash group in the year ending 
30 April 2014. The financial impact to the 
Metcash group of adopting this standard 
has not yet been quantified.

The following accounting standards and 
amendments to accounting standards, when 
applied in future periods, which are not 
expected to have a material impact on the 
financial statements, include the following:
 — AASB 124 (Revised) – Related Party 

Disclosures (December 2009)
 — AASB 2009-11 – Amendments to 

Australian Accounting Standards arising 
from AASB 9

 — AASB 2010-3 – Amendments to Australian 
Accounting Standards arising from the 
Annual Improvements Project

 — AASB 2010-4 – Further Amendments to 
Australian Accounting Standards arising 
from the Annual Improvements Project
 — AASB 2010-5 – Amendments to Australian 

Accounting Standards

 — AASB 2010-6 – Amendments to Australian 
Accounting Standards – Disclosures on 
Transfers of Financial Assets

 — AASB 2010-7 – Amendments to Australian 
Accounting Standards arising from AASB 9 
(December 2010)

On 12 May 2011, the IASB issued the 
following standards:
 — IFRS 10 – Consolidated Financial 

Statements

 — IFRS 11 – Joint Arrangements
 — IFRS 12 – Disclosure of Interests in 

Other Entities

 — IFRS 13 – Fair Value Measurement

These standards have not yet been adopted 
by the AASB. Management are in the process 
of assessing the expected financial impacts of 
these standards which are effective in 2014.

(iii)  BASIS OF CONSOLIDATION
The financial statements comprise the 
consolidated financial statements of Metcash 
Limited and its subsidiaries as at 30 April 2011.

The financial statements of subsidiaries 
are prepared for the same reporting period 
as the parent entity, using consistent 
accounting policies.

Controlled entities are all those entities over 
which the Group has the power to govern the 
financial and operating policies so as to obtain 
benefits from their activities.

Controlled entities are consolidated from the 
date on which control is transferred to the 
Group and cease to be consolidated from 
the date on which control is transferred out 
of the Group.

In preparing the consolidated financial 
statements all intercompany balances and 
transactions have been eliminated in full.

Investments in subsidiaries held by 
Metcash Limited are accounted for at cost 
in the separate financial statements of the 
parent entity.

The acquisition of subsidiaries is accounted 
for using the purchase method of accounting. 
The purchase method of accounting involves 
allocating the costs of the business combination 
to the fair value of the assets acquired and the 
liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed at 
the date of acquisition.

Non-controlling interests not held by the Group 
are allocated their share of net profit after tax in 
the consolidated statement of comprehensive 
income and are presented within equity in the 
consolidated statement of financial position, 
separately from the parent shareholders’ equity.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 61

2  S U M M A R Y   O F   S I G N I F I C A N T   A C C O U N T I N G   P O L I C I E S  C O N T I N U E D

(iv)  REVERSE ACQUISITION
In accordance with AASB 3 Business 
Combinations, in 2005 when Metcash Limited 
(the legal parent) acquired the Metoz group 
(being Metoz Holdings Limited and its controlled 
entities including Metcash Trading Limited (the 
legal subsidiary)), the acquisition was deemed 
to be a reverse acquisition. The consolidated 
financial statements are issued under the name 
of the legal parent (Metcash Limited) but are a 
continuation of the financial statements of the 
deemed acquirer under the reverse acquisition 
rules (Metcash Trading Limited).

(v)  SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING 
JUDGEMENTS, ESTIMATES AND 
ASSUMPTIONS

(a)  Significant accounting judgements
In the process of applying the Group’s 
accounting policies, management has made the 
following judgements, apart from those involving 
estimations, which have a significant effect on the 
amounts recognised in the financial statements:

Contractual customer relationships
Identifying those acquired relationships with 
customers that meet the definition of separately 
identifiable intangibles that have a finite life.

(b)  Significant accounting estimates 
and assumptions
The carrying amounts of certain assets and 
liabilities are often determined based on 
estimates and assumptions of future events. 
The key estimates and assumptions that have a 
significant risk of causing a material adjustment 
to the carrying amounts of certain assets 
and liabilities within the next annual reporting 
period are:

Impairment of goodwill
The Group determines whether goodwill is 
impaired on an annual basis. This requires an 
estimation of the recoverable amount of the 
cash generating units to which the goodwill 
is allocated.

The assumptions used in this estimation of the 
recoverable amount and the carrying amount of 
goodwill are discussed in note 16.

Contractual customer relationships
The useful life of contractual customer 
relationships of 25 years is based on 
management’s expectation of future attrition 
rates based on historical rates experienced.

(vi)  FOREIGN CURRENCY 
TRANSLATION

Translation of foreign currency transactions
Both the functional and presentation currency of 
Metcash Limited and its Australian subsidiaries 
is Australian dollars (A$).

Transactions in foreign currencies are initially 
recorded in the functional currency at the 
exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. 
Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in 
foreign currencies are retranslated at the rate of 
exchange ruling at the reporting date. All exchange 
differences in the consolidated financial report are 
taken to profit or loss.

Translation of financial reports of 
overseas operations
The functional currency of the overseas 
subsidiaries is as follows:
 — Tasman Liquor Company Limited is 

New Zealand dollars.

 — Metoz Holdings Limited is South African rand.
 — Soetensteeg 2–61 Exploitatiemaatschappij 

BV is euros.

As at the reporting date the results of the 
overseas subsidiaries are translated into the 
presentation currency of Metcash Limited. 
Assets and liabilities are translated at the rate 
of exchange ruling at the reporting date whilst 
all elements contained within the consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income are 
translated at the weighted average exchange 
rate for the year.

The exchange differences arising on the 
translation are taken directly to the foreign 
currency translation reserve.

(vii)  CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
Cash comprises cash on hand and demand 
deposits. Cash equivalents are short-term, 
highly liquid investments that are readily 
convertible to known amounts of cash, which 
are subject to an insignificant risk of changes 
in value and have a maturity of three months or 
less at the date of acquisition.

(viii)  TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
Trade receivables are recognised and carried at 
original invoice amount less a provision for any 
uncollectable debts. An estimate for doubtful 
debts is made when collection of the full amount 
is no longer probable. Bad debts are written 
off as incurred.

(ix)  INVESTMENTS AND OTHER 
FINANCIAL ASSETS
All investments are initially recognised at cost, 
being the fair value of the consideration given.

After initial recognition, investments, which 
are classified as held for trading and available-
for-sale, are measured at fair value. Gains or 
losses on investments held for trading are 
recognised in the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income.

For investments that are actively traded in 
organised financial markets, fair value is 
determined by reference to Stock Exchange 
quoted market bid prices at the close of 
business on the relevant reporting date.

(x)  DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL 
INSTRUMENTS
The Group uses derivative financial instruments 
(including forward currency contracts and 
interest rate swaps) to hedge its risks 
associated with foreign currency and interest 
rate fluctuations. Such derivative financial 
instruments are initially recognised at fair value 
on the date at which a derivative contract is 
entered into and are subsequently remeasured 
to fair value.

Derivatives are carried as assets when their fair 
value is positive and as liabilities when their fair 
value is negative.

The fair values of forward currency contracts 
are calculated by reference to current forward 
exchange rates for contracts with similar maturity 
profiles. The fair values of interest rate swaps are 
determined using a valuation technique based 
on cash flows discounted to present value using 
current market interest rates.

Any gains or losses arising from changes in the 
fair value of derivatives, except for those that 
qualify as cash flow hedges, are taken directly 
to profit or loss for the year.

The fair value of derivative contracts are 
determined by reference to market values for 
similar instruments.

For the purposes of hedge accounting, hedges 
are classified as:
 — fair value hedges, when they hedge the 
exposure to changes in the fair value of 
recognised asset or liability; or

 — cash flow hedges, when they hedge the 
exposure to variability in cash flows that 
is attributable either to a particular risk 
associated with a recognised asset or 
liability or to a forecast transaction.

Hedges that meet the strict criteria for hedge 
accounting are accounted as follows:

Cashflow hedges are hedges of the Group’s 
exposure to variability in cash flows that is 
attributable to a particular risk associated with 
a recognised asset or liability or to a forecast 
transaction and that could affect profit or loss. 
The effective portion of the gain or loss on the 
hedging instrument is recognised directly in 
equity, while the ineffective portion is recognised 
in profit or loss.

(xi)  INVESTMENT IN ASSOCIATES
The Group’s investments in its associates 
are accounted for using the equity method 
of accounting in the consolidated financial 
statements. These are the entities in which the 
Group has significant influence and which are 
neither subsidiaries nor joint ventures.

The financial statements of the associates are 
used by the Group to apply the equity method.

The investments in associates are carried in 
the consolidated statement of financial position 
at cost plus post-acquisition changes in the 
Group’s share of net assets of the associate, 
less any impairment in value. Goodwill relating 
to an associate is included in the carrying 
amount of the investment and is not amortised. 
The consolidated statement of comprehensive 
income reflects the Group’s share of the results 
of operations of the associates.

Where there has been a change recognised 
directly in the associate’s equity, the Group 
recognises its share of any changes and 
discloses this in the consolidated statement 
of changes in equity.

62

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

2  S U M M A R Y   O F   S I G N I F I C A N T   A C C O U N T I N G   P O L I C I E S  C O N T I N U E D

(xii)  INVENTORIES
Inventories are valued at the lower of cost or 
net realisable value. Costs incurred in bringing 
each product to its present location and 
condition, are accounted for using the standard 
cost method. Cost is determined by deducting 
from the supplier’s invoice price any purchase 
incentives, allowances, discounts and net 
marketing income.

Net realisable value is the estimated selling 
price in the ordinary course of business, 
less estimated costs of completion and the 
estimated costs necessary to make the sale.

(xiii)  PROPERTY, PLANT AND 
EQUIPMENT

Cost
All classes of property, plant and equipment are 
measured at cost less accumulated depreciation 
and any accumulated impairment losses.

Depreciation
Depreciation is provided on a straight-line basis 
on all property, plant and equipment, other than 
freehold land.

Major depreciation periods are:

2011

2010

Freehold buildings: 

50 years 

50 years

Plant and equipment:  5–15 years  5–15 years

Impairment
The carrying values of plant and equipment 
are reviewed for impairment when events or 
changes in circumstances indicate the carrying 
value may not be recoverable.

For an asset that does not generate largely 
independent cash inflows, the recoverable 
amount is determined for the cash-generating 
unit to which the asset belongs.

If any such indication exists and where the 
carrying values exceed the estimated recoverable 
amount, the assets or cash generating units are 
written down to their recoverable amount.

The recoverable amount of plant and equipment 
is the greater of fair value less costs to sell and 
value in use. In assessing value in use, the 
estimated future cash flows are discounted to 
their present value using a pre-tax discount rate 
that reflects current market assessments of the 
time value of money and the risks specific to 
the asset.

Impairment losses are recognised in the 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

De-recognition
An item of property, plant and equipment is 
de-recognised upon disposal or when no future 
economic benefits are expected to arise from 
the continued use of the asset.

Any gain or loss arising on de-recognition of the 
asset (calculated as the difference between the 
net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount 
of the item) is included in the statement of 
comprehensive income in the period the item is 
de-recognised.

(xiv)  IMPAIRMENT OF ASSETS
At each reporting date, the Group assesses 
whether there is any indication that the 
value of an asset may be impaired. Where 
an indicator of impairment exists, the Group 
makes a formal estimate of recoverable 
amount. Where the carrying amount of an asset 
exceeds its recoverable amount the asset is 
considered impaired and is written down to its 
recoverable amount.

Recoverable amount is the greater of fair 
value less costs to sell and value in use. It is 
determined for an individual asset, unless the 
asset’s value in use cannot be estimated to be 
close to its fair value less costs to sell and it 
does not generate cash inflows that are largely 
independent of those from other assets or 
groups of assets. In this case, the recoverable 
amount is determined for the cash-generating 
unit to which the asset belongs.

In assessing value in use, the estimated future 
cash flows are discounted to their present 
value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects 
current market assessments of the time value of 
money and the risks specific to the asset.

(xv)  LEASES
Leases are classified at their inception as 
either operating or finance leases based on 
the economic substance of the agreement so 
as to reflect the risks and benefits incidental 
to ownership.

Operating leases

(i)  Group as a lessee
Operating leases are those where the lessor 
effectively retains substantially all of the risks 
and benefits of ownership of the leased item. 
Operating lease payments are recognised as 
an expense on a straight-line basis.

(ii)  Group as a lessor
Leases in which the Group retains substantially 
all the risks and benefits of the leased asset 
are classified as operating leases. Initial direct 
costs incurred in negotiating an operating lease 
are added to the carrying amount of the leased 
asset and recognised as an expense over the 
lease term on the same basis as rental income.

Finance leases
Leases that transfer to the Group substantially 
all of the risks and benefits incidental to 
ownership of the leased item, are capitalised 
at the inception of the lease at the lower of fair 
value of the leased property or the present value 
of the minimum lease payments.

Capitalised leases are disclosed as property, 
plant and equipment under lease. A lease 
liability of equal value is also recognised.

Minimum lease payments are apportioned 
between finance charges and reduction of the 
lease liability so as to achieve a constant rate 
of interest on the remaining balance of the 
liability. Finance charges are charged directly 
against income. Capitalised lease assets are 
depreciated over the shorter of the assets 
estimated useful life of the assets and the 
lease term.

The cost of improvements to or on leasehold 
property is capitalised, disclosed as leasehold 
improvements, and amortised over the shorter 
of the unexpired period of the lease or the 
estimated useful lives of the improvements, 
whichever is the shorter.

(xvi)  GOODWILL
Goodwill acquired in a business combination 
is initially measured at cost; being the excess 
of the cost of the business combination over 
the Group’s interest in the net fair value of the 
acquirer’s identifiable assets, liabilities and 
contingent liabilities.

Following initial recognition, goodwill is 
measured at cost less any accumulated 
impairment losses.

Goodwill is not amortised. Goodwill is reviewed 
for impairment annually or more frequently if 
events or changes in circumstances indicate 
that the carrying value may be impaired.

As at the acquisition date, any goodwill acquired 
is allocated to each of the groups of cash-
generating units expected to benefit from the 
combination’s synergies.

Impairment is determined by assessing the 
recoverable amount of the groups of cash-
generating unit to which the goodwill relates. 
Where the recoverable amount of the groups of 
cash-generating units is less than the carrying 
amount, an impairment loss is recognised.

When goodwill forms part of a group of cash-
generating units and an operation within that 
unit is disposed of, the goodwill associated 
with the operation disposed of is included in 
the carrying amount of the operation when 
determining the gain or loss on disposal of 
the operation.

Goodwill disposed of in this circumstance is 
measured based on the relative values of the 
operation disposed of and the portion of the 
groups of cash-generating units retained.

Impairment losses for goodwill are not 
subsequently reversed.

(xvii)  INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Intangible assets acquired separately or in a 
business combination are initially measured at 
cost. Following initial recognition, the cost model 
is applied to the class of intangible assets.

The useful lives of these intangible assets are 
assessed to be either finite or indefinite. Where 
amortisation is charged on assets with finite 
lives, this expense is taken to the profit or loss 
on a straight-line basis.

Intangible assets (excluding software 
development costs) created within the business 
are not capitalised and expenditure is charged 
against profits in the period in which the 
expenditure is incurred.

Intangible assets are tested for impairment 
where an indicator of impairment exists. Useful 
lives are also examined on an annual basis and 
adjustments, where applicable, are made on a 
prospective basis.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 63

2  S U M M A R Y   O F   S I G N I F I C A N T   A C C O U N T I N G   P O L I C I E S  C O N T I N U E D

(b)  Long service leave
The liability for long service leave is recognised 
in the provision for employee benefits and 
measured as the present value of expected 
future payments to be made in respect of 
services provided by employees up to the 
reporting date using the projected unit credit 
method. Consideration is given to expected 
future wage and salary levels, experience of 
employee departures, and periods of service. 
Expected future payments are discounted using 
market yields at the reporting date on national 
government bonds with terms to maturity and 
currencies that match as closely as possible, 
the estimated future cash outflows.

(xx)  INTEREST-BEARING LOANS 
AND BORROWINGS
All loans and borrowings are initially recognised 
at the fair value of the consideration received net 
of issue costs associated with the borrowing.

After initial recognition, interest-bearing 
loans and borrowings are subsequently 
measured at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method.

Gains and losses are recognised in profit or loss 
when the liabilities are de-recognised.

(xxi)  PROVISIONS
Provisions are recognised when the Group 
has a present obligation (legal or constructive) 
as a result of a past event, it is probable that 
an outflow of resources embodying economic 
benefits will be required to settle the obligation 
and a reliable estimate can be made of the 
amount of the obligation.

Where the Group expects some or all of a 
provision to be reimbursed, for example, under 
an insurance contract, the reimbursement is 
recognised as a separate asset but only when 
the reimbursement is probable. The expense 
relating to any provision is presented in the 
consolidated statement of comprehensive 
income net of any reimbursement.

If the effect of the time value of money is 
material, provisions are discounted using 
a current pre-tax rate that reflects the risks 
specific to the liability.

Where discounting is used, the increase in 
the provision due to the passage of time is 
recognised as a borrowing cost.

Provisions for store lease and remediation are 
raised where the economic entity is committed 
by the requirements of the lease agreement. 
The future lease costs, net of any income from 
sub-leasing, are discounted to their net present 
value in determining the provision.

Dividends payable are recognised when a legal 
or constructive obligation to pay the dividend 
arises, typically following approval of the 
dividend at a meeting of directors.

(xxii)  SHARE-BASED PAYMENT 
TRANSACTIONS
The Group provides benefits to employees 
(including executive directors) of the Group in 
the form of share-based payment transactions, 
whereby employees render services in 
exchange for shares or rights over shares 
(equity-settled transactions).

The Group provides benefits to executive 
directors, senior executives and its employees 
in the form of the Metcash Employee Option 
Plan (MEOP) and the Metcash Executive and 
Senior Managers Performance Rights Plan 
(Rights Plan).

The cost of these equity-settled transactions 
with employees is measured by reference to 
the fair value of the equity instruments at the 
date at which they are granted. The fair value 
is determined using an appropriate valuation 
model, further details of which are given in 
Note 17.

In valuing equity-settled transactions, no 
account is taken of any performance conditions, 
other than conditions linked to the price of the 
shares of Metcash Limited (market conditions).

The cost of equity-settled transactions is 
recognised, together with a corresponding 
increase in equity, over the period in which the 
performance conditions are fulfilled, ending 
on the date on which the relevant employees 
become fully entitled to the award (vesting date).

The cumulative expense recognised for equity-
settled transactions at each reporting date until 
vesting date reflects (i) the extent to which the 
vesting period has expired and (ii) the number 
of awards that, in the opinion of the directors 
of the Group, will ultimately vest. This opinion is 
formed based on the best available information 
at balance date. No adjustment is made for the 
likelihood of market performance conditions 
being met as the effect of these conditions is 
included in the determination of fair value at 
grant date.

Where the terms of an equity-settled award 
are modified, as a minimum an expense 
is recognised as if the terms had not been 
modified. In addition, an expense is recognised 
for any increase in the value of the transaction 
as a result of the modification, as measured at 
the date of modification.

Where an equity-settled award is cancelled, 
it is treated as if it had vested on the date of 
cancellation, and any expense not yet recognised 
for the award is recognised immediately. 
However, if a new award is substituted for 
the cancelled award, and designated as a 
replacement award on the date that it is granted, 
the cancelled and new award are treated as if 
they were a modification of the original award, 
as described in the previous paragraph.

The dilutive effect, if any, of outstanding 
options and performance rights are reflected as 
additional share dilution in the computation of 
earnings per share.

Trade Names are recognised as intangible 
assets where a registered trade mark is 
acquired with attributable value. Trade Names 
are valued on a Relief from Royalty method. 
Trade names are considered to be indefinite life 
intangibles and are not amortised. Trade Name 
balances will be tested annually for impairment 
at the same time as goodwill is tested.

Contractual customer relationships are 
recognised as intangible assets when the criteria 
specified in AASB 138 Intangible Assets have 
been met. Contractual customer relationships 
are assessed to have a finite life and are 
amortised over the asset’s useful life.

The carrying value of these assets is 
reviewed for impairment where an indicator of 
impairment exists.

Software development costs incurred on an 
individual project are carried forward when 
future recoverability can reasonably be assured. 
Following the initial recognition of software 
development costs, the cost model is applied 
requiring the asset to be carried at cost less any 
accumulated amortisation and accumulated 
impairment losses.

Any costs carried forward are amortised over 
the assets’ useful economic lives.

The carrying value of software development 
costs is reviewed for impairment annually 
when an asset is not in use or more frequently 
when an indicator of impairment arises during 
a reporting period indicating that the carrying 
value may not be recoverable.

Gains or losses arising from de-recognition of an 
intangible asset are measured as the difference 
between the net disposal proceeds and the 
carrying amount of the asset and are recognised 
in the consolidated statement of comprehensive 
income when the asset is de-recognised.

The estimated useful lives of existing finite life 
intangible assets are as follows:
 — Customer contracts – twenty five years;
 — Software development costs – 

five to ten years.

 — Other – ten years.

(xviii)  TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES
Trade payables and other payables are carried 
at amortised cost. They represent liabilities for 
goods and services provided to the Group prior 
to the end of the financial year that are unpaid 
and arise when the Group becomes obliged 
to make future payments in respect of the 
purchase of these goods and services.

(xix)  EMPLOYEE LEAVE BENEFITS
(a)  Wages, salaries, annual leave 
and sick leave
Liabilities for wages and salaries, including 
non-monetary benefits, annual leave and 
accumulating sick leave expected to be 
settled within 12 months of the reporting date 
are recognised in provisions in respect of 
employees’ services up to the reporting date. 
They are measured at the amounts expected to 
be paid when the liabilities are settled. Liabilities 
for non-accumulating sick leave are recognised 
when the leave is taken and are measured at 
the rates paid or payable.

64

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

2  S U M M A R Y   O F   S I G N I F I C A N T   A C C O U N T I N G   P O L I C I E S  C O N T I N U E D

(xxiii)  REVENUE RECOGNITION
Revenue is recognised to the extent that it is 
probable that the economic benefits will flow 
to the entity and the revenue can be reliably 
measured. The following specific recognition 
criteria must also be met before revenue is 
recognised:
Sale of goods
Revenue is recognised when the significant 
risks and rewards of ownership of the 
goods have passed to the buyer and can 
be measured reliably. Risks and rewards are 
considered passed to the buyer at the time of 
delivery of the goods to the customer.

Rendering of services
Revenue from promotional activities 
is recognised when the promotional 
activities occur.

Interest
Revenue is recognised as the interest is earned.

Dividends
Revenue is recognised when the right to receive 
the payment is established.

Rental income
Rental income is accounted for on a straight-
line basis over the lease term. Contingent rental 
income is recognised as income in the periods 
in which it is earned.

Management fees
Management fees are recognised on an 
accrual basis.

(xxiv)  INCOME TAX
Current tax assets and liabilities for the current 
and prior periods are measured at the amount 
expected to be recovered from, or paid to the 
taxation authority. The tax rates and tax laws 
used to compute the amount are those that 
are enacted or substantively enacted by the 
relevant reporting date.

Deferred income tax is provided on all 
temporary differences at the reporting date, 
between the tax bases of assets and liabilities 
and their carrying amounts for financial 
reporting purposes.

Deferred income tax liabilities are recognised for 
all taxable temporary differences:
 — except where the deferred income tax 

liability arises from the initial recognition 
of an asset or liability in a transaction that 
is not a business combination and, at the 
time of the transaction, affects neither the 
accounting nor taxable profit or loss; and

 — in respect of taxable temporary 

differences associated with investments 
in subsidiaries, associates and interests in 
joint ventures, except where the timing of 
the reversal of the temporary differences 
can be controlled and it is probable that 
the temporary differences will not reverse 
in the foreseeable future.

Deferred income tax assets are recognised for 
all deductible temporary differences, carry-
forward unused tax assets and unused tax 
losses, to the extent that it is probable that 
taxable profit will be available against which 
the deductible temporary differences, and the 
carry-forward of unused tax assets and unused 
tax losses can be utilised:
 — except where the deferred income tax 

asset relating to the deductible temporary 
difference arises from the initial recognition 
of an asset or liability in a transaction that 
is not a business combination and, at the 
time of the transaction, affects neither the 
accounting nor taxable profit or loss; and

 — in respect of deductible temporary 

differences associated with investments 
in subsidiaries, associates and interests in 
joint ventures, deferred tax assets are only 
recognised to the extent that it is probable 
that the temporary differences will reverse 
in the foreseeable future and taxable 
profit will be available against which the 
temporary differences can be utilised.

The carrying amount of deferred income tax 
assets is reviewed at each reporting date 
and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that sufficient taxable profit will be 
available to allow all or part of the deferred 
income tax asset to be utilised.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are 
measured at the tax rates that are expected 
to apply to the year when the asset is realised 
or the liability is settled, based on tax rates 
(and tax laws) that have been enacted 
or substantively enacted at the relevant 
reporting date.

Deferred tax assets and deferred liabilities are 
offset only if a legally enforceable right exists 
to set off current tax assets against current 
tax liabilities and the deferred tax assets and 
liabilities relate to the same taxable entity and 
the same taxation authority.

Income taxes relating to items recognised 
directly in equity are recognised in equity 
and not in the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income.

(xxv)  OTHER TAXES
Revenues, expenses and assets are recognised 
net of the amount of GST except:
 — when the GST incurred on a purchase 

of goods and services is not recoverable 
from the taxation authority, in which case 
the GST is recognised as part of the cost 
of acquisition of the asset or as part of the 
expense item as applicable; and

 — receivables and payables which are stated 

with the amount of GST included.

The net amount of GST recoverable from, or 
payable to, the taxation authority is included 
as part of receivables or payables in the 
consolidated statement of financial position.

Cash flows are included in the Statement of 
Cash Flows on a gross basis and the GST 
component of cash flows arising from investing 
and financing activities, which is recoverable 
from, or payable to, the taxation authority, is 
classified as operating cash flow.

Commitments and contingencies are disclosed 
net of the amount of GST recoverable from, or 
payable to, the taxation authority.

(xxvi)  EARNINGS PER SHARE
Basic earnings per share is calculated as net 
profit attributable to members of the parent, 
adjusted to exclude any costs of servicing 
equity (other than dividends) divided by the 
weighted average number of ordinary shares, 
adjusted for any bonus element.

Diluted earnings per share is calculated as net 
profit attributable to members of the parent, 
adjusted for:
 — costs of servicing equity (other than 

dividends);

 — the after tax effect of dividends and interest 
associated with dilutive potential ordinary 
shares that have been recognised as 
expenses; and

 — other non-discretionary changes in 

revenues or expenses during the period 
that would result from the dilution of 
potential ordinary shares, divided by the 
weighted average number of ordinary 
shares and dilutive potential ordinary 
shares, adjusted for any bonus element.

(xxvii)  CONTRIBUTED EQUITY
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. 
Incremental costs directly attributable to the 
issue of new shares or options are shown 
in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from 
the proceeds.

(xxviii)  FINANCE COSTS
Finance costs are recognised as an expense 
when incurred, except finance costs that are 
capitalised for acquisition of qualifying assets.

(xxix)  RECLASSIFICATION OF PRIOR 
YEAR COMPARATIVES
The comparative figures for Administrative 
costs in the prior year have been reclassified in 
the amount of $14.2 million being the merchant 
fee expense under the American Express 
charge card program which was previously 
classified as Finance Costs.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 65

3  SEGMENT INFORMATION

IDENTIFICATION OF REPORTABLE 
SEGMENTS
The Group has identified its operating segments 
based on the internal reports that are reviewed 
and used by the CEO (the chief operating 
decision maker) in assessing performance and 
in determining allocation of resources.

The operating segments are identified by 
management based on the differences in the 
products and services provided. Discrete 
financial information about each of these 
operating segments is reported to the CEO 
on at least a monthly basis.

The reportable segments are based on 
aggregated operating segments determined by 
the similarity of the products sold, as these are 
the sources of the Group’s major risks and have 
the most effect on the rates of return.

During the next financial year, the Group 
intends to perform a review of the segment 
categories in light of a project that envisages the 
consolidation of food and liquor activities within 
single state-based distribution centres.

Segment products and locations
The group predominantly operates in the 
industries indicated:
 — Food distribution activities comprise the 

distribution of grocery and tobacco supplies 
to retail outlets, convenience stores and 
hospitality outlets.

 — Liquor distribution activities comprise the 
distribution of liquor products to retail 
outlets and hotels.

 — Cash and Carry Distribution comprises the 

distribution of grocery and tobacco supplies 
via cash and carry warehouses.

 — Hardware distribution comprises the 

distribution of hardware supplies to 
retail outlets.

Geographically the group operates 
predominately in Australia.

The New Zealand operation represents less 
than 10% of revenue, results and assets of 
the group.

Segment accounting policies
The selling price between segments is at normal 
selling price and is paid under similar terms and 
conditions as any other customers of the group.

Major Customers
Metcash does not have a single external 
customer which represents greater than 
10% of the group’s revenue.

buSINESS SEgMENTS

FOOD DISTRIbuTION

CASh AND CARRY 
DISTRIbuTION

LIQuOR DISTRIbuTION

hARDwARE 
DISTRIbuTION

CONSOLIDATED

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

Segment Revenue

Sales to external customers

 7,559.9

 7,129.9

 1,709.9

 1,685.3

 2,296.6

 2,640.6

 797.6

 61.6  12,364.0  11,517.4

Inter-segment revenues

 834.3

 772.6

 —

 —

 92.4

 102.1

 —

 —

 926.7

 874.7

Total segment revenue

 8,394.2

 7,902.5

 1,709.9

 1,685.3

 2,389.0

 2,742.7

 797.6

 61.6  13,290.7  12,392.1

Segment profit before tax

 361.8

 346.6

 31.8

 28.8

 30.1

 36.1

 20.7

 1.5

 444.4

 413.0

i)  Segment revenue reconciliation to the statement of comprehensive income

Total segment revenue 

Inter-segment revenues elimination 

Rent 

Interest from other persons/corporations 

Total revenue 

ii)  Segment result reconciliation to the statement of comprehensive income

Segment result 

Net finance costs * 

Rent income 

Rent expense 

Share based payments 

Restructure of Campbells Wholesale branch network 

Franklins acquisition costs 

Amortisation of customer relationships and license agreements 

Other  

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

13,290.7 

12,392.1

(926.7) 

(874.7)

86.4 

11.2 

82.5

8.2

12,461.6 

11,608.1

2011 
$’m

444.4 

(66.3) 

86.4 

(86.4) 

(2.6) 

— 

(6.9) 

(7.9) 

(3.8) 

2010 
$’m

413.0

(49.3)

82.5

(82.5)

(2.6)

(15.4)

—

(6.5)

(9.2)

Total profit from continuing operations before income tax 

356.9 

330.0

*  Refer to Note 2 for prior period reclassification

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
66

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

4  REVENUE AND EXPENSES

(a)  Revenue

Sale of goods 

Rent 

Interest from other persons/corporations 

(b)  Other income

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

 12,364.0  

 11,517.4

 86.4  

 11.2  

 82.5

 8.2

 12,461.6  

 11,608.1

Net profit/(loss) from disposal of property, plant and equipment 

 0.3  

 (0.3)

(c)  Other expenses

Depreciation/ amortisation of property, plant and equipment 

Amortisation of software and other intangibles 

Amortisation of customer relationships and license agreements 

Loss from disposal of associate 

Impairment of trade receivables 

Inventories net realisable value provision 

(d)  Operating lease rental

Minimum lease payments – warehouse and other 

Minimum lease payments – stores 

(e)  Employee benefits expense

Wages and salaries 

Defined contribution plan expense 

Workers compensation costs 

Share-based payments 

Other employee benefits costs 

(f)  Significant items

Franklins acquisitions costs * 

Restructure of Campbells Wholesale Branch network (see Note 21) 

(g)  Finance costs

Interest expense 

Deferred borrowing costs 

 34.1  

 11.3  

 7.9  

 —  

 13.6  

 5.1  

 94.5  

 86.4  

 402.6  

 31.7  

 10.5  

 2.6  

 4.7  

 6.9  

 —  

 73.9  

 3.6  

77.5  

 30.2

 10.0

 6.5

 1.3

 12.1

 7.3

 90.8

 82.5

 382.2

 31.5

 9.5

 2.6

 4.5

 —

 15.4

 54.1

 3.4

 57.5

*  On 29 November 2010, the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (ACCC) commenced proceedings in the Federal Court seeking an injunction 
against Metcash’s proceeding with the acquisition of the shares of Interfrank Group Holdings Pty Ltd, the owner of the Franklins chain of supermarkets, 
from Pick n Pay Retailers (Pty) Ltd. The Federal Court Hearing concluded on 27 April 2011. Either party has 21 calendar days to file an Appeal after 
Judgement. During the current period, Metcash has incurred $6.9 million in relation to the potential acquisition of Franklins. These costs predominantly 
comprise legal fees and have been disclosed as a significant item. Refer also to Note 31.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 67

5  INCOME TAX

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

The major components of income tax expense are:
Current income tax

Current income tax charge 

Adjustments in respect of current income tax of previous years 

Deferred income tax relating to origination and reversal of temporary differences  

Income tax expense reported in the Statement of Comprehensive Income 

A reconciliation between tax expense and the product of accounting profit before income tax multiplied 
by the Group’s applicable income tax rate is as follows:
Accounting profit before income tax 

At the Group’s statutory income tax rate of 30% (2010: 30%) 

Expenditure not allowable for income tax purposes 

Research and development deduction 

Adjustments in respect of current income tax of previous years 

 88.5  

 (3.0) 

20.6  

106.1  

 356.9  

 107.1  

 2.9  

 (0.9) 

 (3.0) 

Income tax expense reported in the Statement of Comprehensive Income at an effective tax rate of 30% (2010: 30%) 

 106.1  

 105.1

 (0.3)

 (5.1)

 99.7

 330.0

 99.0

 1.0

 —

 (0.3)

 99.7

Deferred income tax

Deferred income tax of the Group at 30 April relates to the following:

Deferred tax liabilities

Accelerated depreciation for tax purposes 

Intangibles 

Other 

Set off of deferred tax assets 

Deferred tax assets

Provisions 

Other 

Unutilised tax losses 

Set off of deferred tax liabilities 

Recognised net deferred tax assets

Opening balance 

(Charged)/credited to Statement of Comprehensive Income 

Acquisitions/disposals 

Closing balance 

STATEMENT OF 
FINANCIAL POSITION

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

 3.2  

 45.4  

 0.7  

 (49.3) 

 —  

 53.1  

 0.4  

 2.4  

 (49.3) 

 6.6  

 27.2  

 (20.6) 

 —  

 6.6  

 2.9

 46.6

 —

 (49.5)

 —

 61.1

 12.4

 3.2

 (49.5)

 27.2

 16.2

 5.1

 5.9

 27.2

At 30 April 2011, there is no recognised or unrecognised deferred income tax liability (2010: $nil) for taxes that would be payable on the unremitted 
earnings of certain of the Group’s subsidiaries and associates as the Group has no liability for additional taxation should these earnings be remitted.

The Group has unrecognised capital losses in Australia of $20 million that are available indefinitely for offset against future capital gains.

TAX CONSOLIDATION
Metcash Limited and its 100% owned Australian resident subsidiaries have formed a tax consolidated group with effect from 1 July 2005. Metcash 
Limited is the head entity of the tax consolidated group. Members of the group have entered into a tax sharing arrangement in order to allocate income 
tax expense to the wholly owned subsidiaries on a modified stand alone basis. In addition the agreement will provide for the allocation of income tax 
liabilities between the entities should the head entity default on its tax payment obligations.

TAX EFFECT ACCOUNTING BY MEMBERS OF THE TAX CONSOLIDATED GROUP
Members of the tax consolidated group have entered into a tax funding agreement. The tax funding agreement provides for the allocation of current taxes to 
members of the tax consolidated group in accordance with a group allocation method using modified stand alone tax calculation as the basis for allocation. 
Deferred taxes of members of the tax consolidated group are measured and recognised in accordance with the principles of AASB 112 Income Taxes.

Under the tax funding agreement, funding is based upon the amounts allocated and recognised by the member entities. Accordingly, funding results in 
an increase/decrease in the subsidiaries’ intercompany accounts with the tax consolidated group head company, Metcash Limited.

Refer to Note 31 Contingent Liabilities in respect to amended assessments received by Metcash Limited from the Australian Taxation Office in respect of 
prior year transactions.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
68

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

6  DIVIDENDS PAID AND PROPOSED

(a)  Dividends paid on ordinary shares during the year

(i)  Final fully franked dividend for 2010: 15.0c (2009: 14.0c) 

(ii) 

Interim fully franked dividend for 2011: 11.0c (2010: 11.0c) 

Dividends declared (not recognised as a liability as at 30 April 2011)

Final franked dividend for 2011: 16.0c (2010: 15.0c) 

(b)  Franking credit balance of Metcash Limited

The amount of franking credits available for the subsequent

financial year are:

METCASh gROuP

METCASh LIMITED

2011 
$’m

114.8 

84.6 

199.4 

2010 
$’m

107.1 

84.2 

191.3 

2011 
$’m

114.8 

84.6 

199.4 

2010 
$’m

107.1

84.2

191.3

123.0 

114.8 

123.0 

114.8

— 

franking account balance as at the end of the financial year at 30% (2010: 30%) 

— 

franking credits that will arise from the payment of income tax payable as at the end of the financial year 

—  amount of franking credit of dividends declared but not recognised as a distribution to shareholders during the period 

128.6 

14.3 

(52.7) 

90.2 

97.0

21.8

(49.2)

69.6

(c)  Tax rates

The tax rate at which paid dividends have been fully franked is 30% (2010: 30%).

Dividends declared have been fully franked at the rate of 30% (2010: 30%).

7  CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

Cash at bank and on hand 

(a)  Reconciliation of net profit after tax to net cash flows from operations

Net profit for the period 

Adjustments for:

Depreciation 

Amortisation 

Net (profit)/loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment 

Share of associates’ net loss/(profit) 

Dividends received from associates 

Deferred borrowing costs 

Share based payments 

Net loss on disposal of associate 

Changes in assets and liabilities, net of the effects of purchase and disposal of subsidiaries

(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables 

(Increase)/decrease in other current assets 

(Increase)/decrease in inventories 

(Increase)/decrease in deferred tax assets 

(Decrease)/increase in payables and provisions 

(Decrease)/increase in tax payable 

Net cash from operating activities 

(b)  Non-cash financing and investing activities

Acquisition of assets by means of finance lease 

Capitalisation of debtor to investment in associate 

2011 
$’m

152.9  

 152.9  

2010 
$’m

 210.6

 210.6

250.8  

 230.3

34.1  

19.2  

(0.3) 

1.7  

1.6  

3.6  

2.6  

 —  

 (3.1) 

 (0.9) 

 (203.3) 

 20.6  

 47.2  

 (31.3) 

 30.2

 16.5

 0.3

 (0.3)

 2.0

 3.4

 2.6

 1.3

 37.0

 1.5

 (38.0)

 (5.1)

 9.7

 3.3

 142.5  

 294.7

 4.1  

 —  

 3.2

 7.1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8  TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES (CURRENT)

Trade receivables — Securitised (i) (ii) 

Trade receivables — Non-securitised (ii) 

Allowance for impairment loss 

Customer loans (iii) 

Allowance for impairment loss 

Marketing debtors (iv) 

Other receivables (iv) 

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 69

2011 
$’m

 694.8  

 181.3  

 (20.4) 

 855.7  

 32.0  

 (3.5) 

 884.2  

 41.2  

 81.9  

2010 
$’m

 689.3

 198.7

 (24.4)

 863.6

 34.8

 —

 898.4

 39.4

 70.2

 1,007.3  

 1,008.0

(i)  The group has securitised certain trade receivables by way of granting an equitable interest over those receivables to a special purpose trust managed by a 

major Australian bank. The terms of the securitisation require, as added security, that at any time the book value of the securitised receivables must exceed by 
at least a certain proportional amount, the funds provided by the trust to the group as a consequence of securitisation. At the end of the financial year (refer to 
Note 19iii) trade receivables of $694.8 million (2010: $689.3 million) had been securitised as disclosed above, with $320.0 million (2010: $240.0 million) of funds 
received. The resultant security margin exceeded the minimum required at that date.

(ii)  Trade receivables are non-interest bearing and repayment terms vary by business unit. At 30 April 2011, 92.8% of trade receivables are required to be settled within 
30 days and 7.2% of trade receivables have terms extending from 30 days to 84 days. The amount of the allowance for impairment loss has been measured as the 
difference between the carrying amount of the trade receivables and the estimated future cash flows expected to be received from the relevant debtors.

(iii)  Customer loans receivable are current and have repayment terms of less than 12 months. $0.4 million (2010: $4.0 million) of loans are non-interest-bearing. 

$31.6 million (2010: $30.8) of loans have a weighted average annual interest rate of 7.95% (2010: 8.13%).

(iv)  Marketing debtors and other receivables are non-interest bearing and have repayment terms of less than 12 months.

IMPAIRED TRADE RECEIVABLES AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
During the year ended 30 April 2011 receivables to the value of $14.1 million (2010: $19.2 million) were considered non-recoverable and written off. 
As at 30 April 2011 trade receivables and other receivables with a notional value of $23.9 million (2010: $24.4 million) were provided for as impaired. 
Movement in the allowance for impairment loss:

As at 1 May  

Charge for the year 

Accounts written off as non recoverable 

Increase due to business acquisition 

As at 30 April 

2011 
$’m

 (24.4) 

 (13.6) 

 14.1 

 —  

 (23.9) 

2010 
$’m

 (22.8)

 (12.1)

 19.2

 (8.7)

 (24.4)

DEBTORS AGEING
As at 30 April 2011, the analysis of trade receivables for the Group that were past due but not impaired is as follows:

2011

2010

Neither 
past due 
or impaired 
$’m

less thaN 
30 days 
overdue 
$’m

more thaN 
30 less 
thaN 60 
$’m

more thaN 
60 less 
thaN 90 
$’m

more thaN 
90 less 
thaN 120 
$’m

 654.4

76.5%

723.7

83.8%

136.1

15.9%

98.2

11.4%

12.3

1.4%

9.6

1.1%

12.4

1.4%

4.2

0.5%

7.2

0.8%

4.1

0.5%

more 
thaN 120 
$’m

33.3

3.9%

23.8

2.8%

total 
$’m

855.7

100.0%

863.6

100.0%

The credit quality of the unimpaired trade receivables is good. Metcash believe that the above trade receivables will be fully recovered.

CUSTOMER LOANS AGEING
As at 30 April 2011, the analysis of customer loans receivable for the Group that were past due but not impaired is as follows:

2011

2010

Neither 
past due 
or impaired 
$’m

less thaN 
30 days 
overdue 
$’m

more thaN 
30 less 
thaN 60 
$’m

more thaN 
60 less 
thaN 90 
$’m

more thaN 
90 less 
thaN 120 
$’m

more 
thaN 120 
$’m

total 
$’m

87.7

85.5%

72.5

78.6%

0.0

0.0%

0.5

0.5%

0.3

0.3%

0.6

0.6%

0.3

0.3%

1.5

1.6%

1.0

1.0%

0.4

0.4%

13.2

102.5

13.0%

100.0%

16.9

92.4

18.3%

100.0%

The credit quality of the customer loans is good. As these amounts do not contain impaired assets Metcash believe that the above receivables will be 
fully recovered.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
70

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

8  T R A D E   A N D   O T H E R   R E C E I VA B L E S   ( C U R R E N T )  C O N T I N U E D

OTHER RECEIVABLES AGEING
As at 30 April 2011, the analysis of other receivables for the Group that were past due but not impaired is as follows:

2011

2010

Neither 
past due 
or impaired 
$’m

less thaN 
30 days 
overdue 
$’m

more thaN 
30 less 
thaN 60 
$’m

more thaN 
60 less 
thaN 90 
$’m

more thaN 
90 less 
thaN 120 
$’m

126.0

97.1%

 110.4

94.0%

2.5

1.9%

4.7

4.0%

1.1

0.8%

1.1

0.9%

0.0

0.0%

0.9

0.8%

0.0

0.0%

0.0

0.0%

more 
thaN 120 
$’m

0.1

0.1%

0.3

total 
$’m

129.7

100.0%

 117.4

0.3%

100.0%

The credit quality of the unimpaired other receivables is good. Metcash believe that all the above other receivables will be fully recovered.

CUSTOMER LOAN SECURITY
As at balance date, Metcash provided loans to a number of customers. The outstanding loan balance can be summarised as follows:

Current loans 

Non current loans 

2011 
$’m

28.5 

74.0 

102.5 

2010 
$’m

34.8

57.6

92.4

For certain loans, customers are required to provide security in the event of default. These may include bank guarantees, fixed and floating charges and 
security over property assets. The fair value of these securities as at 30 April 2011 was $30.7 million (2010: $27.1 million)

9  INVENTORIES

Total Finished goods inventories at the lower of cost and net realisable value 

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

954.9 

747.2

Inventory write-downs recognised as an expense totalled $5.1 million (2010: $7.3 million) for the Group. The expense is included in the cost of sales line 
item as a cost of inventory.

10  DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Current
Interest rate forward contracts (i) 

(i)  Derivatives are carried at fair value.

11  RECEIVABLES (NON-CURRENT)
Customer loans (i) 

Other receivables (ii) 

Total 

2011 
$’m

0.9  

 0.9  

74.0 

6.6 

80.6 

2010 
$’m

—

—

57.6

7.8

65.4

(i)  Customer loans receivable are non-current and have repayment terms of greater than 12 months. $6.4 million (2010: $7.3 million) of loans are non-interest bearing. 

$67.6 million (2010: $50.3 million) of loans have a weighted average annual interest rate of 8.34% (2010: 8.99%). Refer to Note 8 for ageing analysis and credit quality.

(ii)  Other receivables are non-interest-bearing and have repayment terms greater than 12 months. These receivables are all neither past due nor impaired. 

Refer Note 8 for ageing analysis and credit quality.

FAIR VALUES
The fair value and carrying values of non-current receivables of the Group are as follows:

Customer loans  

Other receivables  

Total 

carryiNg 
amouNt  
2011 
$’m

74.0 

6.6 

80.6 

carryiNg 
amouNt  
2010 
$’m

57.6 

7.8 

65.4 

fair  
value  
2011 
$’m

76.0 

6.6 

82.6 

fair  
value  
2010 
$’m

58.8

7.8

66.6

The fair values are based on cash flows discounted at a rate reflecting current market rates adjusted for counter party credit risk.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 71

12  INVESTMENTS IN ASSOCIATES

Investments in associates 

INTEREST IN ASSOCIATES

priNcipal activities

balaNce date

Abacus Independent Retail 
Property Trust

Ritchies Stores Pty Ltd

BMS Retail Group Pty Ltd

Dramet Pty Ltd

Dart Trading Co Pty Ltd

Bamlane Pty Ltd

Mundin Pty Ltd

G’Butt Pty Ltd

Mussen Pty Ltd

Ully Pty Ltd

Adcome Pty Ltd

Metfood Pty Ltd

Progressive Trading Pty Ltd 
(Progressive) (i)

Sunshine Hardware Pty Ltd

Northern Hardware Pty Ltd

Retail property investment

Grocery retailing

Grocery retailing

Grocery retailing

Grocery retailing

Grocery retailing

Grocery retailing

Grocery retailing

Grocery retailing

Grocery retailing

Grocery retailing

Merchandise services 
for Metcash and Foodstuffs

Grocery retailing

Hardware retailing

Hardware retailing

30 June

30 June

30 June

30 June

30 June

30 June

30 June

30 June

30 June

30 June

30 June

30 April

30 June

30 June

30 June

2011 
$’m

 92.1  

2010 
$’m

 94.8

OwNERShIP INTEREST

2011 
%

2010 
%

25.0

26.0

25.1

26.0

26.0

26.0

26.0

26.0

26.0

26.0

45.0

50.0

55.4

49.0

49.9

25.0

26.0

25.1

26.0

26.0

26.0

26.0

26.0

26.0

26.0

45.0

50.0

55.4

49.0

—

(i)  Metcash has a direct ownership of 49.0% in Progressive, and an indirect ownership of 6.4% via the 25.1% interest in BMS Retail Group Pty Ltd. Although the 

Group’s total ownership interest in Progressive is greater than 50%, it is still considered to be an associate of the Group, as Metcash Limited does not have the 
power to govern the financial and operating policies of Progressive.

The following table illustrates summarised financial information relating to the Group’s investment in associates.

Share of associates’ profit:

Profit/(loss) before income tax 

Income tax benefit/ (expense) 

Profit/(loss) after income tax 

Share of associates’ Statement of Financial Position:

Current assets 

Non-current assets 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

2011 
$’m

 (2.4) 

 0.7  

 (1.7) 

 86.7  

 150.4  

 237.1  

 (130.4) 

 (46.2) 

 (176.6) 

 60.5  

2010 
$’m

 0.4

 (0.1)

 0.3

 61.6

 134.4

 196.0

 (82.7)

 (55.8)

 (138.5)

 57.5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
72

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

13  INFORMATION RELATING TO METCASH LIMITED (THE PARENT ENTITY)
In accordance with the amendment to the Corporations Act 2001, the company has replaced the separate parent entity financial statements with the 
following note.

Current assets 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

Contributed equity 

Retained earnings 

Share based payments reserve 

Total equity 

Net profit for the period 

Total comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 

Metcash Limited has provided guarantees as part of the Closed Group arrangements as disclosed in Note 26 (c)

14  OTHER FINANCIAL ASSETS (NON-CURRENT)

METCASh LIMITED

2011 
$’m

1,562.4 

6,178.5 

3,462.6 

3,462.6 

2,715.9 

2,570.9 

123.0 

22.0 

2010 
$’m

1,314.4

5,930.5

3,237.9

3,237.9

2,692.6

2,558.2

114.9

19.5

2,715.9 

 2,692.6

207.5 

207.5 

199.1

199.1

Investment in shares (unlisted) 

15  PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Year ended 30 April 2011

At 1 May 2010,

net of accumulated depreciation and impairment 

Additions 

Acquisition from business combination (Refer Note 29) 

Disposals 

Exchange differences 

Depreciation and impairment charge for the year 

At 30 April 2011,

2011 
$’m

 0.2  

 0.2  

laNd aNd 
buildiNgs 
$’m

plaNt aNd 
eQuipmeNt 
$’m

 64.7  

 12.1  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (1.5) 

 130.0  

 26.0  

 1.3  

 (2.3) 

 (0.1) 

 (32.6) 

2010 
$’m

 0.2

 0.2

total 
$’m

 194.7

 38.1

 1.3

 (2.3)

 (0.1)

 (34.1)

net of accumulated depreciation and impairment 

 75.3  

 122.3  

 197.6

At 1 May 2010,

Cost or fair value 

Accumulated depreciation and impairment 

Net carrying amount 

At 30 April 2011,

Cost or fair value 

Accumulated depreciation and impairment 

Net carrying amount 

 70.0  

 (5.3) 

 64.7  

 82.1  

 (6.8) 

 75.3  

 261.0  

 (131.0) 

 130.0  

 279.0  

 (156.7) 

 122.3  

 331.0

 (136.3)

 194.7

 361.1

 (163.5)

 197.6

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1 5  P R O P E R T Y,   P L A N T   A N D   E Q U I P M E N T  C O N T I N U E D

Year ended 30 April 2010

At 1 May 2009,

net of accumulated depreciation and impairment 

Additions 

Acquisition from business combination  

Disposals 

Depreciation charge for the year 

At 30 April 2010,

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 73

laNd aNd 
buildiNgs 
$’m

plaNt aNd 
eQuipmeNt 
$’m

 50.6  

 2.9  

 11.9  

 —  

 (0.7) 

 112.8  

 39.4  

 8.7  

 (1.4) 

 (29.5) 

total 
$’m

 163.4

 42.3

 20.6

 (1.4)

 (30.2)

net of accumulated depreciation and impairment 

 64.7  

 130.0  

 194.7

At 1 May 2009,

Cost or fair value 

Accumulated depreciation and impairment 

Net carrying amount 

At 30 April 2010,

Cost or fair value 

Accumulated depreciation and impairment 

Net carrying amount 

 55.2  

 (4.6) 

 50.6  

 70.0  

 (5.3) 

 64.7  

 269.6  

 (156.8) 

 112.8  

 261.0  

 (131.0) 

 130.0  

 324.8

 (161.4)

 163.4

 331.0

 (136.3)

 194.7

The carrying value of plant and equipment held under finance leases and hire purchase contracts at 30 April 2011 is $15.8 million (2010: $18.8 million).

16  INTANGIBLE ASSETS AND GOODWILL

Year ended 30 April 2011

At 1 May 2010

Net carrying amount 

Additions 

Acquisition from business combination (Refer Note 29) 

Exchange differences 

Amortisation 

At 30 April 2011

Net carrying amount 

At 30 April 2011

Cost (gross carrying amount) 

Accumulated amortisation and impairment 

Net carrying amount 

Year ended 30 April 2010

At 1 May 2009

Net carrying amount 

Additions 

Acquisition from business combination 

Disposals 

Amortisation 

At 30 April 2010

Net carrying amount 

At 30 April 2010

software 
developmeNt 
costs 
$’m

customer 
coNtracts 
$’m

goodwill 
$’m

trade 
Names 
$’m

other 
$’m

total 
$’m

 63.1  

 18.4  

 —  

 —  

 (11.3) 

 156.3  

 1,032.8  

 27.2  

 2.6  

 1,282.0

 2.4  

 —  

 —  

 (7.6) 

 —  

 7.8  

 (0.3) 

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (0.3) 

 20.8

 7.8

 (0.3)

 (19.2)

 70.2  

 151.1  

 1,040.3  

 27.2  

 2.3  

 1,291.1

 168.6  

 (98.4) 

 186.3  

 1,040.3  

 (35.2) 

 —  

 70.2  

 151.1  

 1,040.3  

 45.7  

 27.2  

 —  

 (0.1) 

 (9.7) 

 137.9  

 15.0  

 9.9  

 —  

 (6.5) 

 993.6  

 —  

 39.2  

 —  

 —  

 27.2  

 —  

 27.2  

 —  

 —  

 27.2  

 —  

 —  

 3.0  

 (0.7) 

 1,425.4

 (134.3)

 2.3  

 1,291.1

 2.9  

 1,180.1

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (0.3) 

 42.2

 76.3

 (0.1)

 (16.5)

 63.1  

 156.3  

 1,032.8  

 27.2  

 2.6  

 1,282.0

Cost (gross carrying amount) 

Accumulated amortisation and impairment 

Net carrying amount 

 150.2  

 (87.1) 

 183.9  

 1,032.8  

 (27.6) 

 —  

 63.1  

 156.3  

 1,032.8  

 27.2  

 —  

 27.2  

 3.0  

 (0.4) 

 1,397.1

 (115.1)

 2.6  

 1,282.0

 
 
74

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

1 6  I N TA N G I B L E   A S S E T S   A N D   G O O D W I L L  C O N T I N U E D

(a)  DESCRIPTION OF THE GROUP’S INTANGIBLE ASSETS & GOODWILL

Software development costs
Development costs have been capitalised at cost and are amortised using the straight-line method over the asset’s useful economic life. Useful lives 
range from five to ten years. Software development costs are tested for impairment where an indicator of impairment exists. Useful lifes are also 
estimated on an annual basis and adjustments, where applicable, are made on a prospective basis.

Customer contracts
Customer contracts are acquired either through business combinations or through direct acquisition of contractual relationships. The carrying amount 
represents the costs less accumulated amortisation. Customer contracts are amortised over a 25 year period. The amortisation has been recognised in 
the statement of comprehensive income in the line item “Administrative Costs”. If an impairment indication arises, the recoverable amount is estimated 
and an impairment loss is recognised to the extent that the recoverable amount is less than the carrying amount. No impairment loss was required to be 
recognised during the period.

Trade names
Trade names have been acquired through business combinations and are carried at cost less any impairment losses. These intangible assets have been 
determined to have an indefinite useful life. Trade names will be subjected to impairment testing on an annual basis or whenever there is an indication of 
impairment. Impairment testing has been carried out in February 2011. No impairment loss was required to be recognised during the period.

Other
The company entered into an Alliance Agreement with Lenards Pty Ltd in 2009 to offer customers the opportunity to purchase products under Lenards 
Franchise. The agreement fee is being amortised over 10 years, straight line. The intangible is carried at cost less accumulated amortisation.

(b)  IMPAIRMENT TESTS FOR GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLES WITH INDEFINITE USEFUL LIVES

Goodwill

(i)  Description of cash generating units
Goodwill acquired through business combinations have been allocated to the lowest level within the entity at which the goodwill is monitored by 
management, being the four business pillars (IGA>D, CCC, ALM and Mitre 10), which are reportable segments (Food Distribution, Cash and Carry 
Distribution, Liquor Distribution and Hardware Distribution). Under AIFRS, goodwill and intangibles with indefinite lives have to be tested annually and 
when impairment indicators arise, provided the testing is done at the same time each year. Impairment testing was conducted in February 2011. The 
group of cash generating units (CGU) used for impairment testing are as follows:
IGA Distribution, Campbells Wholesale, Australian Liquor Marketers and Mitre 10.

The recoverable amount of the group of CGUs has been determined based on value in use calculation using cash flow projections based on financial 
projections covering a five year period.

(ii)  Key assumptions used in valuations
The Group has applied the following key assumptions in its cash flow projections:
Budgeted gross margins — These have been estimated based on utilisation of existing assets and on the average gross margins achieved 
immediately before the budgeted year, increased for expected efficiency improvements.

Discount rates — The weighted average cost of capital for the Group based on risk free rates of return, the company’s risk profile relative to the 
market, the marginal cost of borrowing for the company, its average level of gearing and a market risk premium.

Future growth — driven by population growth, estimated food and hardware inflation and changes in market share.

The pre-tax discount rate applied to cash flow projections is 12.93% (2010: 12.67%) and cash flows beyond the five year period are extrapolated using 
a 2.5% growth rate (2010: 2.5%) which is based on the historical population and applicable product inflation and growth rates for each group of CGU’s.

(iii)  Sensitivity to changes in assumptions
The table below summarises the Goodwill attributed to each group of CGU’s and potential impairment trigger point at the impairment testing date of 
February 2011:

 group of cgu’s

IGA Distribution 

Campbells Wholesale 

Australian Liquor Marketers 

Mitre 10 

goodwill 
$’m

885.1 

32.9 

88.9 

27.8 

discouNt rate 
at which impairmeNt 
is triggered 
%

*

14.39%

13.26%

17.30%

*  No reasonably possible change in any of the above key assumptions would cause the carrying value of the unit to materially exceed its recoverable amount

Trade Names
(i)  Trade names only arise in the Mitre 10 segment as in the Mitre 10 segment as a result the acquisitions during financial year 2010.

 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 75

1 6  I N TA N G I B L E   A S S E T S   A N D   G O O D W I L L  C O N T I N U E D

(ii)  Key assumptions used in valuations
Royalty rate — An estimate based on similar royalty rates for similar types of franchising store formats in a similar industry from a global analysis

Budgeted gross margins — These have been estimated based on utilisation of existing assets and on the average gross margins achieved 
immediately before the budgeted year, increased for expected efficiency improvements.

Discount rates — The weighted average cost of capital for the Mitre 10 Group based on risk free rates of return, the company’s risk profile relative 
to the market, the marginal cost of borrowing for the company, its average level of gearing and a market risk premium.

Future growth — Driven by population growth, estimated inflation and changes in market share.

(iii)  Sensitivity to changes in assumptions
No reasonably possible change in any of the above key assumptions would cause the carrying value of the trade names to materially exceed its 
recoverable amount.

17  SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS

(a)  TYPES OF SHARE-BASED PAYMENT PLANS
The Group has two share-based incentive plans for employees and executive directors of the Group: the Metcash Employees Option Plan (MEOP) and 
the Metcash Executives and Senior Managers Performance Rights Plan (Rights Plan). Fully paid ordinary shares issued under these plans rank equally 
with all other existing fully paid ordinary shares, in respect of voting and dividends rights.

Metcash Employee Option Plan (MEOP)
The Board may at such times as it determines issue invitations to eligible employees and hurdle participants to participate in the Employee Share Option 
Plan. Eligibility is usually achieved after three months of employment.

The purpose of the scheme is to:
 — create a joint purpose of success between Metcash and its employees;
 — involve employees directly in the outcomes achieved by Metcash; and
 — add wealth for employees and other shareholders.

The exercise price of options is determined as the closing price on the Stock Exchange Automated Trading System (SEATS), excluding special 
crossings, overnight sales and exchange traded option exercises of the shares on the grant date, or such other price as determined by the Board.

The vesting of options occurs as follows:
 — 60% of the options issued to a participant become exercisable from the third anniversary of the grant date;
 — a further 20% become exercisable from the fourth anniversary of the grant date; and
 — the remaining 20% become exercisable from the fifth anniversary of the grant date.

Options must be exercised prior to the sixth anniversary of the grant date, at which time they expire.

Where an employee ceases to be employed by any Group Company the options issued to that participant will automatically lapse, except where the 
employee has ceased to be an employee by reason of total and permanent disability, death, retirement and such other circumstances as the Board may 
determine. In these circumstances, the Board may give its written approval to the Participant or their personal representative to exercise the options 
during such further period as the Board may determine.

In addition, options will lapse on the winding up of the company or where the Participant has acted fraudulently or dishonestly.

An option may be exercised immediately in the event of:
 — any party becoming entitled to acquire shares by way of a compulsory acquisition; or
 — a resolution being passed by the Company to which any party becomes or will become “entitled” to 100% of the issued shares; or
 — a participant’s employment being terminated by any Group Company at any time within the period of six months after any party who is not at the 

grant date “entitled” to 50% or more of the shares becomes so entitled.

Exercise prices or option holdings will be pro-rated in the event of a Bonus issue, rights issue or reorganisation of the share capital of the Company.

Metcash Executives and Senior Managers Performance Rights Plan (Rights Plan)
The Rights Plan provides selected employees with the opportunity to be rewarded with fully paid ordinary shares as an incentive to create long term 
growth in value for Metcash shareholders. The plan is administered by a trustee who may acquire (and hold in trust) shares for the benefit of participants. 
These shares are purchased on market or issued to the trustee once the performance rights vest.

The essential elements of the Rights Plan are as follows:
 — each Performance Right is an entitlement to receive a fully paid ordinary share in the Company on terms and conditions determined by the Board, 

including vesting conditions linked to service and performance over a 3 year period;

 — Performance Rights are offered at no cost to the Senior Executive/Senior Manager and as such, significantly fewer Performance Rights are offered 

than was the case with options;

 — Performance Rights are offered annually with vesting after 3 years subject to achievement of hurdle rates. For the 2011 financial year this was set between 
5% and 10% compound underlying earnings per share growth. (i.e. 5% underlying earnings per share growth earns 50% of the Performance Rights 
allocation and 10% underlying earnings per share growth earns 100% of the allocation). Pro rata payments are to be made for achievements between 5% 
and 10%. If the vesting conditions are satisfied, the Performance Rights vest and shares will be issued to the Executive or Senior Manager;

 — underlying earnings per share is calculated on the company’s underlying profit, adjusted for non-recurring and significant items such as goodwill 

impairment or amortisation, or other non cash accounting items;

 — persons offered Performance Rights will not be offered options under the MEOP or any other form of long term incentive;
 — Performance Rights do not carry voting or dividend rights, however shares issued upon vesting of Performance Rights will carry the same rights as 

other ordinary shares;

 — the number of Performance Rights granted is determined by dividing the value of an Executive’s/Senior Manager’s long term incentive entitlement by 

the Company’s share price at the time of issue.

76

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

1 7  S H A R E - B A S E D   PAY M E N T S  C O N T I N U E D

(b)  SUMMARY OF OPTIONS AND RIGHTS GRANTED

MEOP
During the year no options were issued to Executive Directors (2010: nil), as disclosed in Note 27 (b).

The following table illustrates the number of options and exercise prices and movements during the year ended 30 April 2011 and 30 April 2010:

2011 
Number

2011 
exercise price 
$

2010 
Number

2010 
exercise price 
$

Outstanding at the beginning of the year 

30,235,024  

32,202,323

Reinstated during the year 

Exercised during the year:

Expired during the year 

Outstanding at the end of the year 

The outstanding balance as at 30 April 2011 is represented by:

17,700  

 Various  

8,920  

Various

—  

(1,649,613) 

(1,560,000) 

(2,916,790) 

—  

3.925  

4.013  

(340,000) 

(415,668) 

—  

2.430

3.925

—

 Various  

(1,220,551) 

Various

24,126,321 

— 

30,235,024 

—

expiry date

2 September 2011 

2 September 2011 

7 February 2014 

exercise price

Number

exercisable

 $4.013  

 $3.925  

2,110,000 

5,721,078 

 $4.267  

16,295,243 

1,480,000 

5,721,078 

9,777,146 

Rights Plan
The following table illustrates the movement in the number of Performance Rights during the year ended 30 April 2011:

Outstanding at the beginning of the year 

Granted during the year 

Vested during the year 

Expired/forfeited during the year 

Outstanding at the end of the year 

The Performance Rights all expire on 30 June 2013 at which point they either convert or lapse, as per the terms of the Rights Plan.

The Performance Rights have a remaining contractual life of 2.2 years.

(c)  Weighted average fair value
The weighted average fair value of Performance Rights granted during the year was $3.62 per Performance Right (2010: nil).

(d)  Option pricing model
The Performance Rights issued have been valued using the Black Scholes option pricing model.

The following table lists the inputs to the valuation model for the year ending 30 April 2011:

Dividend yield 

Risk free rate 

Expected volatility 

Life of Performance Rights 

Exercise price 

Share price at measurement date 

remaiNiNg 
coNtractual 
life (years)

0.3

0.3

2.8

2011 
Number

—

1,415,137

—

(15,752)

1,399,385

2011

6.19%

5.36%

16.63%

940 days

—

 $4.20

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 77

18  TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES (CURRENT)

Trade payables 

Accrued GST/Wine equalisation tax 

Accrued marketing expenses 

Accrued purchases and payroll expense 

Other payables 

Trade and other payables are non-interest-bearing and are normally settled within 30-day terms.

(a)  FAIR VALUE
Due to the short term nature of these payables, their carrying value approximates their fair value.

19  INTEREST BEARING LOANS AND BORROWINGS

Current

Finance lease obligation (i) 

Non-current

Finance lease obligation (i) 

Bank loans — syndicated (ii) 

Debt securitisation (iii) 

Deferred borrowing costs 

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

1,205.4 

1,110.1

25.8 

52.2 

81.6 

11.5 

42.2

49.3

78.9

13.9

1,376.5 

1,294.4

2011 
$’m

8.6 

8.6 

11.5 

500.0 

320.0 

(5.0) 

826.5 

2010 
$’m

7.8

7.8

16.4

500.0

240.0

(7.0)

749.4

(i)  Finance leases have an average lease term of five years with the option to purchase the asset at the completion of the lease term for the asset’s market value. 

The average discount rate implicit in the lease is 9.47% (2010: 8.71%). Secured lease liabilities are secured by a charge over the leased asset.

(ii)  Bank loans are a three year senior unsecured syndicated loan note subscription facility, which expires 31 May 2012. The bank loans are covered by certain 

financial undertakings as follows:
The bank facility has three covenants that the Group must comply with, being a fixed charges cover ratio (Earnings Before Interest, Tax, Depreciation, 
Amortisation and Net Rent (EBITDAR) divided by Total Net Interest plus Net Rent Expense), senior leverage ratio (Total Group Debt divided by Earnings Before 
Interest, Tax, Depreciation and Amortisation (EBITDA)) and minimum shareholders funds (a fixed figure representing the Group share capital and reserves). 
Interest payable on the facility is based on BBSY plus a margin and rollover is quarterly. The applicable margin is dependent upon an escalation matrix linked to 
the senior leverage ratio achieved.

(iii)  The securitisation facility is evergreen in nature, subject to the periodic renewal of liquidity support. The facility is not expected to be repaid in the ordinary 
course of business in the coming financial year. The securitisation facility may be terminated by the trust manager at short notice in the event of an act of 
default, which includes the insolvency of any of the individual companies securitising trade receivables, failure of the economic entity to remit funds when due, 
or a substantial deterioration in the overdue proportion of the eligible receivables.

(a)  FAIR VALUE
The carrying amount of the Group’s current and non-current borrowings approximate their fair value. The weighted average effective interest rate on 
bank loans and debt securitisation for the year was 6.18% (2010: 6.45%).

(b)  DEFAULTS OR BREACHES
During the current and prior years, there were no defaults or breaches on any of the loans.

(c)  INTEREST RATE RISK AND LIQUIDITY RISK
Details regarding interest rate risk and liquidity risk are disclosed in Note 24.

20  DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Current

Foreign currency forward contracts (i) 

(i)  Derivatives that are designated and effective as hedging instruments are carried at fair value.

2011 
$’m

 1.4  

 1.4  

2010 
$’m

0.6

0.6

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
78

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

21  PROVISIONS

Current

Employee entitlements 

Rental subsidy (i) 

Restructuring (ii) 

Other 

Non-current

Employee entitlements 

Rental subsidy (i) 

Total 

(a)  MOVEMENTS IN PROVISIONS (OTHER THAN EMPLOYEE ENTITLEMENTS)

1 May 2010 

Arising during the year 

Utilised 

Unused amounts released 

30 April 2011 

reNtal 
subsidy 
$’m

 38.5  

 2.0  

 (5.3) 

 (0.8) 

 34.4  

restructuriNg 
$’m

 14.8  

 1.5  

 (12.6) 

 —  

 3.7  

2011 
$’m

 60.5  

 8.9  

 3.7  

 0.3  

 73.4  

 28.7  

 25.5  

 54.2  

2010 
$’m

 77.5

 6.8

 14.8

 0.7

 99.8

 30.0

 31.7

 61.7

 127.6  

 161.5

other 
$’m

 0.7  

 —  

 (0.4) 

 —  

 0.3  

total 
$’m

54.0

3.5

(18.3)

(0.8)

 38.4

Other provisions contain a number of insignificant balances, the costs of which are expected to be incurred within the next financial year.

(b)  NATURE AND TIMING OF PROVISIONS

(i)  Rental subsidy provision
From time to time, Metcash will enter into head lease arrangements on certain retail properties. These properties are typically sub leased to retail 
customers on commercial terms and conditions. Where the head lease rental expense exceeds the sub lease rental income, a provision is raised for the 
difference in rental streams for the period of the sub lease. These cash flow differentials are then discounted back to their present value using a discount 
rate for an equivalent security of similar terms.

(ii)  Restructure provision
Restructure of Campbells Wholesale Branch Network to close 8 warehouses. Costs provided include employee termination costs, inventory 
markdowns, relocation costs and exit costs for leased premises.

22  OTHER FINANCIAL LIABILITIES

Current

Lease incentives 

Non-current

Lease incentives 

2011 
$’m

 0.2  

 0.2  

 1.8  

 1.8  

2010 
$’m

0.2

0.2

1.9

1.9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 79

23  CONTRIBUTED EQUITY AND RESERVES

a)  Ordinary shares:

Issued and fully paid 

Movements in ordinary shares on issue

At 1 May 

Issued during the year:

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

1,904.9 

1,904.9 

1,892.2

1,892.2

2011 

2010

Number of 
shares

$’m

Number of 
shares

$’m

765,644,031 

 1,892.2  

764,888,363 

 1,889.7

 – Exercise of employee options – At 392.5 cents per share 

 – Exercise of employee options – At 243.0 cents per share 

 – Exercise of employee options – At 401.3 cents per share 

1,649,613 

— 

1,560,000 

 6.4  

 —  

 6.3  

415,668 

340,000 

— 

 1.7

 0.8

 —

At 30 April 

768,853,644 

 1,904.9  

765,644,031 

 1,892.2

Fully paid ordinary shares carry one vote per share and carry the right to dividends.

RESERVES

At 1 May 2009 

Foreign currency translation adjustments 

Share-based payments 

Movement in fair value of derivatives 

At 30 April 2010 

Foreign currency translation adjustments 

Share-based payments 

Movement in fair value of derivatives 

At 30 April 2011 

Nature and purpose of reserves

share- 
based 
paymeNts 
$’m

 17.1  

 —  

 2.6  

 —  

 19.7  

 —  

 2.6  

 —  

 22.3  

capital 
profits 
$’m

 12.8  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 12.8  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 12.8  

cash flow 
hedge 
reserve 
$’m

foreigN 
curreNcy 
traNslatioN 
$’m

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (0.1) 

 (0.1) 

 —  

 —  

 0.1  

 —  

 (6.0) 

 (0.6) 

 —  

 —  

 (6.6) 

 (0.3) 

 —  

 —  

 (6.9) 

total 
$’m

 23.9

 (0.6)

 2.6

 (0.1)

 25.8

 (0.3)

 2.6

 0.1

 28.2

Share-based payments reserve
This reserve is used to record the value of equity benefits provided to employees and executive directors as part of their remuneration. Refer to Note 17 
for further details of these plans.

Capital profits reserve
The capital profits reserve is used to accumulate realised capital profits. The reserve can be used to pay dividends or issue bonus shares.

Foreign currency translation reserve
The foreign currency translation reserve is used to record exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of foreign 
subsidiaries. It is also used to record the effect of hedging net investments in foreign operations.

Cash flow hedge reserve
This reserve records the portion of the unrealised gain or loss on a hedging instrument in a cash flow hedge that is determined to be an effective hedge.

Retained earnings

At 1 May 

Profit for the period 

Dividends 

At 30 April 

Other equity

At 30 April 

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

 166.0  

 241.4  

 (199.4) 

 208.0  

 129.7

 227.6

 (191.3)

 166.0

 (765.9) 

 (765.9)

The other equity account is used to record the reverse acquisition adjustment on application of AASB 3 Business Combinations in 2005. Refer also 
Note 2(a)(iv).

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
80

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

24  FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES AND POLICIES

FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES AND POLICIES
The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise bank loans and overdrafts, finance and operating leases, cash and short-term deposits 
and derivatives.

The main purpose of these instruments is to raise finance for the Group’s operations. The Group has various other financial assets and liabilities such as 
trade receivables and payables, which arise directly from its operations.

The Group manages its exposure to key financial risks including interest rate and credit risks in accordance with the Group’s financial risk management 
policy. The objective of the policy is to support delivery of the Group’s financial targets while protecting future financial security.

The Group enters into a small number of derivative transactions from time to time principally to manage interest rate and foreign currency risks arising 
from the Group’s operations and its sources of finance.

The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are cash flow interest rate risk and credit risk. The Board reviews and agrees policies for 
managing each of these risks and they are detailed below.

Details of the significant accounting policies and methods adopted, including the criteria for recognition, the basis of measurement and the basis on 
which income and expenses are recognised, in respect of each class of financial instrument, financial liability and equity instrument are disclosed in 
Note 2 Summary of Significant Accounting Policies.

RISK EXPOSURES AND LIQUIDITY RISK EXPOSURES

Interest rate risk
The Group’s exposure to the risk of changes in market interest rates relates primarily to the Group’s long-term debt obligations with a floating interest rate.

The Group enters into interest rate derivatives designated to limit the Group’s exposure to volatility in interest payments from time to time.

On 9 June 2010, the Group has entered into a number of interest rate swap contracts with various major Australian banks. The principal hedged is 
$300 million with a weighted hedge maturity of 2 years and a weighted average interest rate of 5.13%. The Group considers that these derivatives are 
effective hedges in accordance with AASB 139 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement and therefore accounted for as cash flow hedges 
in accordance with the Group’s stated accounting policies.

At balance date, the Group had the following mix of financial assets and liabilities exposed to Australian variable interest rate risk that, except as 
indicated, are not designated in cash flow hedges:

Financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents 

Financial liabilities

Bank loans 

Debt securitisation 

Less: Interest rate swaps notional principal value — designated as cash flow hedges 

Net exposure 

Refer to Note 19 for details of bank loans and debt securitisation.

2011 
$’m

152.9 

152.9 

(500.0) 

(320.0) 

300.0 

(520.0) 

(367.1) 

2010 
$’m

210.6

210.6

(500.0)

(240.0)

—

(740.0)

(529.4)

The Group’s treasury policy requires that core debt is hedged between a minimum and maximum range over certain maturity periods.

Core debt is defined as the minimum level of drawn debt which is expected to occur over the year.

As at 30 April 2011, the interest rate swap hedges of $300 million fell within the required range.

The interest rate swap contracts noted above have a fair value of $0.9 million (2010: nil) and are exposed to fair value movements if interest 
rates change.

Sensitivity analysis
The Group constantly analyses its interest rate exposure. Within this analysis, consideration is given to potential renewal of existing positions, alternative 
financing, alternative hedging positions and the mix of fixed and floating interest rates.

The table below shows the effect on post tax profit and other comprehensive income at balance date if interest rates had moved by 0.5% higher or 
0.25% lower. These movements have been selected as they are considered reasonable, given the current economic climate and the current levels of 
short and long term Australian interest rates. It is assumed within this calculation that all other variables have been held constant and that the borrowings 
are in Australian dollars. It also includes the impact any interest rate derivatives that the company may have in place.

If interest rates were to increase by 0.50% (50 basis points) 

If interest rates were to decrease by 0.25% (25 basis points) 

PROFIT AFTER TAX 
hIghER/(LOwER) 

OThER 
COMPREhENSIvE INCOME 
hIghER/(LOwER)

2011 
$’m

(1.3) 

 0.6  

2011 
$’m

(1.9) 

 0.9  

2010 
$’m

2.9 

(1.5) 

2010 
$’m

—

 —

The movements in profit are due to higher/lower interest costs from variable rate banking and other loans. The movement in other comprehensive 
income is due to cashflow hedge fair value adjustments on interest rate swap contracts.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 81

2 4  F I N A N C I A L   R I S K   M A N A G E M E N T   O B J E C T I V E S   A N D   P O L I C I E S  C O N T I N U E D

LIQUIDITY RISK AND FUNDING MANAGEMENT
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will be unable to meet its payment obligations when they fall due under normal and stress circumstances. To limit 
this risk, management manages assets with liquidity in mind, and monitors future cash flows and liquidity on a daily basis. The Group has four different 
sources of debt funding, of which 64.0% have been utilised at 30 April 2011.

Remaining contractual maturities
Remaining contractual liabilities consist of non-interest bearing trade and other payables amounting to $1,376.5 million for the Group and are due in one 
year or less.

Maturity analysis of financial assets and liabilities based on contracted date
The risk implied from the values shown in the table below, reflects a balanced view of cash inflows and outflows. Leasing obligations, trade payables and 
other financial liabilities mainly originate from the financing of assets used in our ongoing operations such as property, plant, equipment and investments 
in working capital such as inventories and trade receivables. These assets are considered in the Group’s overall liquidity risk. The following table reflects 
the contracted date of settlement of financial assets and liabilities. This is also the expected date of settlement.

year eNded 30 april 2011

Financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade and other receivables 

Derivative financial instruments 

Financial liabilities

Trade and other payables 

Finance lease liability 

Bank and other loans 

year eNded 30 april 2010

Financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade and other receivables 

Derivative financial instruments 

Financial liabilities

Trade and other payables 

Finance lease liability 

Bank and other loans 

1 year 
or less 
$’m

152.9 

1,007.3 

— 

1,160.2 

1,376.5 

8.9 

50.1 

1,435.5 

1 year 
or less 
$’m

210.6 

1,008.0 

— 

1,218.6 

1,294.4 

9.6 

47.6 

1,351.6 

The Group monitors forecasts of liquidity reserves on the basis of expected cash flow.

At balance date, the Group had unused credit facilities available for its immediate use as follows:

Syndicated facility 

Securitisation facility 

Working capital/guarantees 

Working capital 

Cash and cash equivalents 

total 
facility 
$’m

700.0 

400.0 

150.0 

75.0 

1,325.0 

— 

1,325.0 

debt 
usage 
$’m

guaraNtees aNd 
other usage 
$’m

500.0 

320.0 

— 

— 

820.0 

— 

820.0 

— 

— 

28.6 

— 

28.6 

— 

28.6 

1–5 years 
$’m

more thaN 
5 years 
$’m

— 

80.6 

0.9 

81.5 

— 

14.2 

819.5 

833.7 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1–5 years 
$’m

more thaN 
5 years 
$’m

— 

65.4 

— 

65.4 

— 

18.6 

792.5 

811.1 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

cash 
$’m

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

152.9 

152.9 

total 
$’m

152.9

1,087.9

0.9

1,241.7

1,376.5

23.1

869.6

2,269.2

total 
$’m

210.6

1,073.4

—

1,284.0

1,294.4

28.2

840.1

2,162.7

facility 
available 
$’m

200.0

80.0

121.4

75.0

476.4

152.9

629.3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
82

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

2 4  F I N A N C I A L   R I S K   M A N A G E M E N T   O B J E C T I V E S   A N D   P O L I C I E S  C O N T I N U E D

Derivative financial liabilities
The table below details the liquidity risk arising from derivative liabilities held by the Group at the reporting date.

Year ended 30 April 2011

Derivative liabilities — net settled 

Derivative liabilities — gross settled

— 

Inflows 

—  Outflows 

Net maturity 

Year ended 30 April 2010

Derivative liabilities — net settled 

Derivative liabilities — gross settled

— 

Inflows 

—  Outflows 

Net maturity 

1–6 mths 
$’m

6–12 mths 
$’m

1–5 years 
$’m

>5 years 
$’m

 —  

 11.0  

(12.0) 

(1.0) 

 —  

8.3 

(8.9) 

(0.6) 

 —  

 3.2  

(3.6) 

(0.4) 

 —  

1.3 

(1.3) 

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

total 
$’m

 —

 14.2

(15.6)

(1.4)

 —

 9.6

(10.2)

(0.6)

Gross settled derivatives comprise forward exchange contracts that are used to hedge anticipated purchase commitments.

CREDIT RISK
The Group trades with a large number of customers across the business operations and it is Group policy that all customers who wish to trade on credit 
terms are subject to credit verification procedures. In addition, where a loan has been provided, the Group will seek to take security over certain assets 
of the customer wherever possible.

The management of the receivables balance is key in the minimisation of the potential bad debt exposure to the company. Receivables balances are 
monitored on an ongoing basis and a formal review of all balances occurs every 6 months and where necessary appropriate provisions are established.

As identified in Note 8 (Trade and Other Receivables), the current level of impairment provision represents less than 2.1% of the receivables balance, 
indicating that the balances are actively and effectively managed.

There are no significant concentrations of credit risk within the Group.

FOREIGN CURRENCY RISK
The Groups exposure to foreign exchange fluctuations relates to transactions and balances in New Zealand dollars. The operations denominated 
in New Zealand dollars represent less than 5% of total sales and total profit after tax, and as such exposure is minimal.

In addition, the Group undertakes some foreign currency transactions in the purchases of goods and services. The Group enters into forward 
foreign exchange contracts and foreign currency options to manage the risk associated with anticipated purchase commitments denominated 
in foreign currencies.

The amount of foreign exchange cover is based on anticipated future purchases in light of current conditions in foreign markets, commitments 
from customers and experience.

PRICE RISK
The Group purchases energy in the form of electricity, petrol and oil, LPG and water from various sources. These costs represent less than 5% of 
combined Distribution and Administrative expenses. The group enters into periodic contracts for supply of these products via third party tender. No 
derivative price instruments are used to manage price risk associated with these commodities as the Group’s exposure to commodity and equity 
security price risk is minimal.

CAPITAL MANAGEMENT
The Board’s intention is to return earnings to shareholders while retaining adequate funds within the business to reinvest in future growth opportunities. 
A minimum payout ratio of 60% of reported earnings per share has been set by the Board. A dividend reinvestment plan is in existence and is currently 
suspended as the Board considers the Company has sufficient capital and is generating sufficient cash flow to pay dividends as and when they fall due. 
The plan is able to be reinstituted at any time.

The Group provides benefits to employees (including executive directors) of the Group in the form of share-based payment transactions, whereby 
employees render services in exchange for shares or rights over shares (equity-settled transactions). The Group provides these benefits in the form 
of the Metcash Employee Option Plan (MEOP) and the Metcash Executive and Senior Managers Performance Rights Plan (Rights Plan). Details are 
disclosed in Note 17.

The Board and management set out to achieve and maintain Statement of Financial Position ratios that would satisfy an investment grade rating. Certain 
Statement of Financial Position ratios are imposed by the Syndicated Debt Facility. The nature and calculation of these ratios are not disclosed due to 
commercial sensitivity.

Management monitor capital through the gearing ratio (debt / total capital). The gearing ratios at 30 April 2011 and 2010 were 36.7% and 35.5% 
respectively. This is within an acceptable target range.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 83

2 4  F I N A N C I A L   R I S K   M A N A G E M E N T   O B J E C T I V E S   A N D   P O L I C I E S  C O N T I N U E D

FAIR VALUE
The Group uses various methods in estimating the fair value of a financial instrument. The different methods have been defined as follows:

* 
* 

* 

Level 1: the fair value is calculated using quoted prices in active markets.
Level 2: the fair value is estimated using inputs other than quoted prices included in Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either 
directly (as prices ) or indirectly (derived from prices)
Level 3: the fair value is estimated using inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data.

The table below analyses financial instruments carried at fair value, by valuation method:

 year eNded 30 april 2011

Derivative financial assets 

Derivative financial liabilities 

 year eNded 30 april 2010

Derivative financial liabilities 

level 1 
$’m

 —  

 —  

 —  

level 1 
$’m

 —  

 —  

level 2 
$’m

 0.9  

(1.4) 

(0.5) 

level 2 
$’m

(0.6) 

(0.6) 

level 3 
$’m

 —  

 —  

 —  

level 3 
$’m

 —  

 —  

total 
$’m

 0.9

(1.4)

(0.5)

total 
$’m

(0.6)

(0.6)

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of the financial assets and liabilities recorded in the financial statements approximates their fair value as 
at the reporting date.

25  COMMITMENTS

(a) OPERATING LEASE COMMITMENTS
The Group has entered into commercial leases on certain forklifts, land and buildings. These leases have an average lease term of five years and an implicit 
interest rate of 8.41%. Contingent rentals are payable to reflect movements in the Consumer Price Index on certain leases and to reflect the turnover of 
certain stores occupying the land and buildings. Future minimum rentals payable under non-cancellable operating leases as at 30 April are as follows:

Within 1 year 

After 1 year but not more than 5 years 

More than 5 years 

2011 
$’m

158.5 

552.6 

389.8 

2010 
$’m

148.7

481.2

449.9

Aggregate lease expenditure contracted for at reporting date 

1,100.9 

1,079.8

(b)  OPERATING LEASE RECEIVABLES
Certain properties under operating lease have been sublet to third parties. These leases have an average lease term of five years and an implicit interest 
rate of 8.41%. The future lease payments expected to be received at the reporting date are:

Within 1 year 

After 1 year but not more than 5 years 

More than 5 years 

2011 
$’m

73.8 

283.7 

257.5 

615.0 

2010 
$’m

58.5

201.3

233.1

492.9

(c)  FINANCE LEASE COMMITMENTS
The Group has finance leases for various items of vehicles and equipment. The weighted average interest rate impact in the leases is 9.47% (2010: 
8.71%). Future minimum lease payments under finance leases together with the present value of the net minimum lease payments for the Group are 
as follows:

Within 1 year 

After 1 year but not more than 5 years 

More than 5 years 

Less amounts representing finance charges 

Present value of minimum lease payments 

FuTuRE MINIMuM  
LEASE PAYMENTS 

PRESENT vALuE OF MINIMuM 
LEASE PAYMENTS

2011 
$’m

 8.9  

14.2  

 —  

 23.1  

 (3.0) 

 20.1  

2010 
$’m

 9.6  

 18.6  

 —  

 28.2  

 (4.0) 

 24.2  

2011 
$’m

 8.6  

 11.5  

 —  

 20.1  

 —  

 20.1  

2010 
$’m

 7.8

 16.4

 —

 24.2

 —

 24.2

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
84

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

26  RELATED PARTY DISCLOSURE

(a)  SUBSIDIARIES
The consolidated financial statements include the financial statements of Metcash Limited and the subsidiaries listed in the following table.

NAME 

COuNTRY OF INCORPORATION 

PERCENTAgE OF EQuITY INTEREST 
hELD bY ThE CONSOLIDATED ENTITY

A.C.N. 131 933 376 Pty Ltd 

Action Holdco Pty Limited 

Action Holdings Pty Ltd (i) 

Action Projects Proprietary Limited 

Action Supermarkets Pty Ltd (i) 

Amalgamated Confectionery Wholesalers Pty. Ltd. (i) 

Arrow Pty Limited  

Australian Asia Pacific Wholesalers Pty Ltd 

Australian Liquor Marketers (QLD) Pty Ltd (i) 

Australian Liquor Marketers (WA) Pty Ltd (i) 

Australian Liquor Marketers Pty. Limited (i) 

Blue Lake Exporters Pty Ltd 

Bofeme Pty Ltd 

Campbells Cash and Carry Pty. Limited (i) 

Casuarina Village Shopping Centre Pty. Ltd. 

City Ice and Cold Storage Company Proprietary Limited 

Clancy’s Food Stores Pty Limited 

Composite Buyers Finance Pty. Ltd. 

Composite Buyers Pty Limited 

Composite Pty. Ltd. 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Cornerstone Retail Pty Ltd (formerly NZ Holdco Limited) (ii) 

Australia 

Davids Food Services Pty Ltd 

Davids Group Staff Superannuation Fund Pty. Ltd. 

Denham Bros. Pty Limited 

Drumstar V2 Pty Ltd 

FAL Properties Pty. Ltd. 

FAL Share Plan Nominees Pty Ltd 

FAL Superannuation Fund Pty Ltd 

Five Star Wholesalers Pty. Ltd. 

Foodchain Holdings Pty Ltd 

Foodland Properties Pty Ltd 

Foodland Property Holdings Pty. Ltd. 

Foodland Property Unit Trust 

Garden Fresh Produce Pty Ltd 

Garden Fresh Produce Trust 

Gawler Supermarkets Pty. Ltd. 

Global Liquor Wholesalers Pty. Limited 

GP New Co Pty Ltd 

Green Triangle Meatworks Pty Limited 

Harvest Liquor Pty. Ltd. 

IGA Community Chest Limited (ii) 

IGA Distribution (SA) Pty Limited (i) 

IGA Distribution (Vic) Pty Limited (i) 

IGA Distribution (WA) Pty Limited (i) 

IGA Distribution Pty Limited (i) 

IGA Fresh (Northern Queensland) Pty Limited 

IGA Fresh (NSW) Pty Limited 

IGA Pacific Pty Limited 

IGA Retail Network Limited (ii) 

IGA Retail Services Pty Limited 

Independent Brands Australia Pty Limited (ii) 

Jewel Food Stores Pty. Ltd. 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

2011 
%

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

2010 
%

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 85

2 6  R E L AT E D   PA R T Y   D I S C L O S U R E  C O N T I N U E D

NAME 

COuNTRY OF INCORPORATION 

PERCENTAgE OF EQuITY INTEREST 
hELD bY ThE CONSOLIDATED ENTITY

Jewel Superannuation Fund Pty Ltd 

Jorgensens Confectionery Pty. Limited 

Keithara Pty. Ltd. 

Knoxfield Transport Service Pty. Ltd. 

M C International Australia Pty Limited 

Melton New Co Pty Ltd 

Metcash Export Services Pty Ltd 

Metcash Holdings Pty Ltd 

Metcash Management Pty Limited 

Metcash Services Proprietary Limited 

Metcash Storage Pty Limited 

Metcash Trading Limited (i) 

Metoz Holding Limited 

Metro Cash & Carry Pty Limited 

Mirren (Australia) Pty. Ltd. 

Mittenmet Limited * 

Moorebank Transport Pty Ltd 

Moucharo Pty. Ltd. 

Newton Cellars Pty Ltd 

NFRF Developments Pty Ltd 

Nu Fruit Pty. Ltd. 

Payless Superbarn (N.S.W.) Pty Ltd 

Payless Superbarn (VIC.) Pty. Ltd. 

Pinnacle Holdings Corporation Pty Limited 

Plympton Properties Pty. Ltd. 

Property Reference Pty. Limited 

QIW Pty Limited 

Queensland Independent Wholesalers Pty Limited 

Quickstop Pty Ltd (i) 

Rainbow Supermarkets Pty Ltd 

Rainbow Unit Trust 

Rainfresh Vic Pty. Ltd. 

Regeno Pty Limited 

Regzem (No 3) Pty. Ltd. 

Regzem (No 4) Pty. Ltd. 

Rennet Pty. Ltd. 

Retail Merchandise Services Pty. Limited 

Retail Stores Development Finance Pty. Limited 

Rockblock Pty. Ltd. 

R.S.D.F. Nominees Pty. Ltd. 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

South Africa 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Soetensteeg 2 61 Exploitatiemaatschappij BV 

Netherlands  

SR Brands Pty Ltd 

Stonemans (Management) Proprietary Limited 

Stonemans Self Service Pty. Ltd. 

Tasher No 8 Pty. Ltd. 

Tasman Liquor Company Limited 

Vawn No 3 Pty. Ltd. 

Wickson Corporation Pty Limited 

Wimbledon Unit Trust 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

New Zealand 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

2011 
%

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 50.1  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 51  

 51  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 51  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

2010 
%

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 50.1

 100

 100

 100

 51

 51

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 51

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 
 
86

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

2 6  R E L AT E D   PA R T Y   D I S C L O S U R E  C O N T I N U E D

*  Mittenmet Limited
The consolidated financial statements include the financial statements of Mittenmet Limited and the subsidiaries listed in the following table.

NAME 

COuNTRY OF INCORPORATION 

ACN 008 698 093 (WA) Ltd Ltd 

Anzam (Aust.) Pty Ltd 

Australian Hardware Support Services Pty Ltd 

Chelsea Heights Operations Pty Limited 

DIY Superannuation Pty Ltd 

Echuca Hardware Pty Ltd 

Handyman Stores Pty Ltd 

Hardware Property Trust 

Himaco Pty Ltd 

Lilydale Operations Pty Limited 

Mega Property Management Pty Ltd 

Mitre 10 Pty Ltd (formerly Mitre10 Limited) 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Mitre 10 Australia Pty Ltd (formerly Mitre10 Australia Ltd) 

Australia 

Mitre 10 Mega Pty Ltd 

Narellan Hardware Pty Ltd 

National Retail Support Services Pty Ltd 

South Coast Operations Pty Ltd 

South West Operations Pty Ltd 

Sydney Importing Co Limited (In Liquidation) 

Timber and Hardware Exchange Pty Ltd 

WA Hardware Services Pty Ltd 

(b)  ULTIMATE PARENT
Metcash Limited is the ultimate parent entity.

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

Australia 

PERCENTAgE OF EQuITY INTEREST 
hELD bY MITTENMET LTD

2011 
%

2010 
%

 99.44  

 99.44

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100  

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 100

 97.65  

 52.00  

 100  

 97.65

 52.00

 100

(c)  ENTITIES SUBJECT TO CLASS ORDER RELIEF
Pursuant to an order from ASIC under section 340(1) of the Corporations Act dated 26 April 2006 which is based on Class Order 98/1418 (Order), relief 
has been granted to certain controlled entities of Metcash Limited, being those marked (i), from the Corporations Act requirements for preparation, audit 
and lodgment of their financial reports. As a condition of the Order, Metcash Limited and the controlled entities, being those marked as (i) (the Closed 
Group) entered into a Deed of Cross Guarantee on 27 April 2006 or assumption deed on 17 January 2007. The entities marked (ii) are also party to the 
Deed of Cross Guarantee, but are not eligible for inclusion in the financial reporting relief. The effect of the deed is that Metcash Limited has guaranteed 
to pay any deficiency in the event of winding up of these controlled entities. These controlled entities have also given similar guarantees in the event that 
Metcash Limited is wound up.

 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 87

2 6  R E L AT E D   PA R T Y   D I S C L O S U R E  C O N T I N U E D

The Statement of Comprehensive Income and Statement of Financial Position of the entities that are members of the ‘Closed Group’ are as follows:

(i)  Statement of Comprehensive Income

Profit before income tax 

Income tax expense  

Net profit for the period 

Retained profits at the beginning of the financial year 

Dividends provided for or paid 

Retained profits at the end of the financial year 

(ii)  Statement of Financial Position

ASSETS

Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade and other receivables 

Inventories 

Other 

Total current assets 

Non-current assets

Receivables 

Investments  

Property, plant and equipment 

Net deferred tax assets 

Intangible assets and goodwill 

Total non-current assets 

Total assets 

LIABILITIES

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables 

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings 

Income tax payable 

Provisions 

Total current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings 

Provisions 

Total non-current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

NET ASSETS 

EQUITY

Contributed equity 

Other equity 

Reserves 

Retained profits 

TOTAL EQUITY 

CLOSED gROuP

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

 314.5  

 (94.3) 

 220.2  

 161.5  

 (199.4) 

 182.3  

 116.9  

 829.2  

 907.8  

 7.2  

 320.4

 (98.8)

 221.6

 131.2

 (191.3)

 161.5

 177.3

 752.3

 755.3

 4.9

 1,861.1  

 1,689.8

 80.6  

 65.4

 2,547.5  

 2,450.4

 92.9  

 17.8  

 127.0

 14.3

 1,045.9  

 1,036.8

 3,784.7  

 3,693.9

 5,645.8  

 5,383.7

 1,101.9  

 1,078.5

 6.6  

 12.0  

 31.6  

 5.1

 43.5

 32.8

 1,152.1  

 1,159.9

 3,117.0  

 2,886.5

 20.3  

 17.2

 3,137.3  

 2,903.7

 4,289.4  

 4,063.6

 1,356.4  

 1,320.1

 1,904.9  

 (765.9) 

 35.1  

 182.3  

 1,892.2

 (765.9)

 32.3

 161.5

 1,356.4  

 1,320.1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
88

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

(d)  TRANSACTIONS WITH RELATED PARTIES

 related party

Group

Associates

Sales to associates 

Dividends received from associates 

 sales to 
related parties 
$’m

 purchases from 
related parties 
$’m

 other traNsactioNs 
 with related parties 
$’m

2011    

2010 

2011 

2010 

 1,236.5 

1,224.5 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

—

1.6

2.0

Other transactions with Key Management Personnel
Mr Barnes is Chairman of Samuel Smith and Sons Pty Ltd and a Director of Ansell. Mrs Balfour is a director of Salmat Limited. All organisations are 
suppliers to the Group under normal commercial terms and conditions. The total level of purchases from all companies is less than 0.4% of Metcash’s 
annual purchases and is not considered material.

Parent

Associates
There were no transactions between the parent and its associates during the year (2010: nil).

Subsidiaries
Dividend received 

Current tax payable/ (receivable) 

assumed from wholly owned 

consolidated entities

Management fees received 

Interest accrued 

2011 

2010 

2011 

2010 

2011 

2010 

2011 

2010 

 — 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

   — 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

199.1

16.9

43.6

461.3

177.3

251.1

174.7

Terms and conditions of transactions with related parties
All transactions with related parties are made on normal commercial terms and conditions.

Terms and conditions of the tax funding agreement are set out in Note 5.

(e)  AMOUNTS DUE FROM OR PAYABLE TO RELATED PARTIES

 related party

Group

Associates

Trade receivables 

Loans receivable 

Parent

Subsidiaries

Loans receivable 

Loans payable 

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

 139.7  

 56.3  

 105.9

 46.2

1,562.4  

 3,445.7  

 1,314.4

 3,194.3

Terms and conditions of amounts due from and payable to related parties
Loans and trade receivables are due and payable on normal commercial terms and conditions.

For the year ending 30 April 2011, the Group has not made any allowance for impairment loss relating to trade receivables or loans due from associates.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 89

27  DIRECTORS’ AND EXECUTIVES’ DISCLOSURES

(a)  Details of Key Management Personnel

 directors

executives

Carlos S dos Santos (i) 

Former Non-executive Chairman 

Ken Bean 

CEO Group Logistics and Corporate Development

Peter L Barnes 

Andrew Reitzer 

Non-executive Chairman 

Fergus Collins 

CEO Australian Liquor Marketers

Chief Executive Officer 

Peter Dubbelman 

CEO Campbells Wholesale

Fiona E Balfour (ii) 

Non-executive Director 

Adrian Gratwicke (iv) 

Chief Financial Officer

Michael R Butler 

Non-executive Director 

Bernard Hale 

Chief Information Officer

Neil D Hamilton 

Non-executive Director 

Michael Jablonski (v) 

Group Merchandise Director

Edwin M Jankelowitz (iii) 

Non-executive Director 

David Johnston 

Chief Human Resources Officer

Richard A Longes 

Non-executive Director 

Mark Laidlaw 

CEO Mitre10

V Dudley Rubin 

Non-executive Director 

Silvestro Morabito 

CEO IGA Distribution

Harry Rumpler 

Greg Watson (vi) 

CEO IGA Fresh

General Counsel and Company Secretary

(i)   Mr dos Santos retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010 and was not considered a Key Management Personnel subsequent to this date.
(ii)   Mrs Balfour was appointed to the Metcash Board on 16 November 2010.
(iii)  Mr Jankelowitz retired as Finance Director on 31 March 2011 and became a non-executive Director on 1 April 2011
(iv)  Mr Gratwicke appointed Chief Financial Officer on 17 January 2011
(v)   Mr Jablonski retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010 and continues in his Executive role as Group Merchandise Director.
(vi)  Mr Watson appointed General Counsel and Company Secretary on 24 December 2010

The Group has applied the exemption under Corporations Amendments Regulations 2006 which exempts listed companies from providing remuneration 
disclosures in relation to their Key Management Personnel in their annual financial reports by Accounting Standard AASB 124 Related Party Disclosures. 
These disclosures are provided within the Directors’ Report designated as audited.

(b)  (i) OPTION HOLDING OF KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL (MEOP)

 30 april 2011

Directors

C S dos Santos (i) 

P Barnes 

M Butler 

F Balfour 

R Longes 

D Rubin 

A Reitzer 

M Jablonski (ii) 

E Jankelowitz (iii) 

Executives

K Bean 

F Collins 

P Dubbelman 

A Gratwicke 

B Hale 

M Laidlaw (iv) 

D Johnston 

S Morabito 

H Rumpler 

G Watson (iv) 

Total 

balaNce at 
begiNNiNg of 
period 1 may 2010

graNted as 
remuNeratioN

optioNs 
exercised

other 
adjustmeNts

balaNce 
 at eNd of 
period 
30 april 2011

vESTED AT 30 APRIL 2011

total

exercisable

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 1,200,000  

 650,000  

 650,000  

 400,000  

 50,000  

 400,000  

 543,000  

 650,000  

 —  

 400,000  

 399,700  

 550,000  

 —  

 5,892,700  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (520,000) 

 (520,000) 

 —  

 —  

 (400,000) 

 (33,000) 

 —  

 —  

 (320,000) 

 (12,575) 

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 1,200,000  

 1,200,000  

 960,000  1

 130,000  

 130,000  

 130,000  

 130,000  

 —  1

 —  1

 400,000  

 400,000  

 400,000

 50,000  

 50,000  

 50,000

 —  

 —  

 —

 510,000  

 310,000  

 310,000

 650,000  

 650,000  

 520,000  1

 400,000  

 400,000  

 260,000  

 260,000

 —  

 —  

 —  

 80,000  

 80,000  

 80,000

 387,125  

 247,125  

 247,125

 550,000  

 350,000  

 350,000

 362,000  

 362,000  

 222,000  

 222,000

 (1,805,575) 

 762,000  

 4,849,125  

 4,029,125   3,399,125

(i)  Mr dos Santos retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010.
(ii)  Mr Jablonski retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010 and continues in his Executive role as Group Merchandise Director.
(iii)   Mr Jankelowitz retired as Finance Director on 31 March 2011 and was appointed Non-Executive Director on 1 April 2011.
(iv)   Mr Laidlaw and Mr Watson were appointed to key management personnel roles during the year. Their option holdings at the time of appointment are shown 

1 

as other adjustments.
Final 20% of the options granted in 2005 did not meet the performance hurdle and did not vest. These options will be cancelled from the register on 
2 September 2011.

 
 
 
 
 
 
90

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

2 7  D I R E C T O R S ’   A N D   E X E C U T I V E S ’   D I S C L O S U R E S  C O N T I N U E D

 30 april 2010

Directors

C S dos Santos 

P Barnes 

M Butler 

R Longes 

D Rubin 

A Reitzer 

M Jablonski 

E Jankelowitz 

L Jardin (i) 

Executives

K Bean 

F Collins 

P Dubbelman 

A Gratwicke 

B Hale 

D Johnston 

S Morabito (ii) 

H Rumpler 

Total 

balaNce at 
begiNNiNg of 
period 1 may 2009

graNted as 
remuNeratioN

optioNs 
exercised

other 
adjustmeNts

balaNce 
 at eNd of 
period 
30 april 2010

vESTED AT 30 APRIL 2010

total

exercisable

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 1,200,000  

 650,000  

 650,000  

 650,000  

 400,000  

 50,000  

 400,000  

 550,000  

 990,000  

 400,000  

 —  

 550,000  

 6,490,000  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (7,000) 

 (340,000) 

 —  

 (300) 

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 400,000  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 1,200,000  

 960,000  

 960,000

 650,000  

 520,000  

 520,000

 650,000  

 520,000  

 520,000

 650,000  

 520,000  

 520,000

 400,000  

 320,000  

 320,000

 50,000  

 40,000  

 40,000

 400,000  

 320,000  

 320,000

 543,000  

 33,000  

 33,000

 650,000  

 520,000  

 520,000

 400,000  

 320,000  

 320,000

 399,700  

 550,000  

 39,700  

 39,700

 40,000  

 40,000

 (347,300) 

 400,000  

 6,542,700  

 4,152,700    4,152,700

(i)  Mr Jardin resigned from the Metcash Board on 9 February 2010 and ceased to be a key management person at this time.
(ii)  Mr Morabito was appointed CEO IGA Distribution 17 February 2010. Mr Morabito held 400,000 options prior to his appointment, these are reflected as 

other adjustments.

(b)  (ii) PERFORMANCE RIGHTS HOLDING OF KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL

 30 april 2011

Directors

P Barnes 

M Butler 

F Balfour 

R Longes 

D Rubin 

A Reitzer 

M Jablonski (i) 

E Jankelowitz (ii) 

Executives

K Bean 

F Collins 

P Dubbelman 

A Gratwicke 

B Hale 

D Johnston 

M Laidlaw 

S Morabito 

H Rumpler 

G Watson 

Total 

balaNce at 
begiNNiNg 
of period 
1 may 2010

graNted as 
remuNeratioN

balaNce at 
eNd of period 
30 april 2011

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 70,171  

 70,171

 —  

 —

 58,159  

 53,923  

 54,514  

 59,770  

 58,053  

 45,728  

 49,166  

 70,171  

 42,479  

 23,628  

 58,159

 53,923

 54,514

 59,770

 58,053

 45,728

 49,166

 70,171

 42,479

 23,628

 585,762  

 585,762

(i)  Mr Jablonski retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010 and continues in his Executive role as Group Merchandise Director.
(ii)   Mr Jankelowitz retired as Finance Director on 31 March 2011 and was appointed non-executive Director on 1 April 2011.

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 91

2 7  D I R E C T O R S ’   A N D   E X E C U T I V E S ’   D I S C L O S U R E S  C O N T I N U E D

(c)  SHAREHOLDING OF KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL

 30 april 2011

Directors

C S dos Santos (i) 

P Barnes 

A Reitzer 

F Balfour (iv) 

M Butler 

N Hamilton 

M Jablonski (ii) 

E Jankelowitz (iii) 

R Longes 

D Rubin 

Executives

K Bean 

F Collins 

P Dubbelman 

A Gratwicke 

B Hale 

D Johnston 

M Laidlaw 

S Morabito 

H Rumpler 

G Watson 

Total 

balaNce at 
begiNNiNg 
of period 
1 may 2010

 54,100  

 177,083  

 1,750,000  

 —  

 50,000  

 20,000  

 —  

 320,000  

 128,154  

 15,000  

 —  

 1,600  

 50,350  

 45,950  

 610,000  

 80,000  

 —  

 5,700  

 —  

 —  

 3,307,937  

graNted as 
remuNeratioN

oN market 
trade

optioNs 
exercised

other 
adjustmeNts

balaNce 
at at eNd 
of period 
30 april 2011

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (520,000) 

 (520,000) 

 520,000  

 520,000  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (400,000) 

 (25,000) 

 (110,000) 

 (320,000) 

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 400,000  

 33,000  

 —  

 320,000  

 —  

 12,575  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 54,100

 177,083

 1,750,000

 13,600  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 13,600

 50,000

 20,000

 —

 320,000

 128,154

 15,000

 —

 1,600

 50,350

 53,950

 500,000

 80,000

 —

 18,275

 —

 —

 (1,895,000) 

 1,805,575  

 13,600  

 3,232,112

(i)  Mr dos Santos retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010.
(ii)   Mr Jablonski retired from the Metcash Board on 2 September 2010 and continues in his Executive role as Group Merchandise Director.
(iii)   Mr Jankelowitz retired as Finance Director on 31 March 2011 and was appointed Non-Executive Director on 1 April 2011.
(iv)   Mrs Balfour was appointed to the Metcash Board on 16 November 2010. Her shareholding as at that date is reflected as an other adjustment.

 30 april 2010

Directors

C S dos Santos 

P Barnes 

A Reitzer 

M Butler 

N Hamilton 

M Jablonski 

E Jankelowitz 

L Jardin (i) 

R Longes 

D Rubin 

Executives

K Bean 

F Collins 

P Dubbelman 

A Gratwicke 

B Hale 

D Johnston 

S Morabito (ii) 

H Rumpler 

Total 

balaNce at 
begiNNiNg 
of period 
1 may 2009

 54,100  

 177,083  

 1,750,000  

 50,000  

 —  

 —  

 520,000  

 —  

 128,154  

 15,000  

 —  

 1,600  

 400,350  

 35,242  

 270,000  

 80,000  

 —  

 —  

 3,481,529  

graNted as 
remuNeratioN

oN market 
trade

optioNs 
exercised

other 
adjustmeNts

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 20,000  

 —  

 (200,000) 

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (350,000) 

 3,708  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 7,000  

 340,000  

 —  

 300  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 5,400  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

balaNce 
at at eNd 
of period 
30 april 2010

 54,100

 177,083

 1,750,000

 50,000

 20,000

 —

 320,000

 —

 128,154

 15,000

 —

 1,600

 50,350

 45,950

 610,000

 80,000

 5,700

 —

(i)   Mr Jardin resigned from the Metcash Board on 9 February 2010 and ceased to be a key management personnel at this time.
(ii)   Mr Morabito was appointed CEO IGA Distribution 17 February 2010. Mr Morabito held 5,400 shares prior to his appointment, these are reflected as 

other adjustments.

 (526,292) 

 347,300  

 5,400  

 3,307,937

 
 
92

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

2 7  D I R E C T O R S ’   A N D   E X E C U T I V E S ’   D I S C L O S U R E S  C O N T I N U E D

(d)  COMPENSATION BY CATEGORY

Short-term 

Long-term 

Post employment 

Termination benefits 

Share-based payments 

Total 

2011 
$’m

 13.5  

 3.2  

 0.3  

 0.6  

 0.4  

 18.0  

2010 
$’m

 12.3

 3.0

 0.2

 —

 0.4

 15.9

The Group has applied the option under Corporations Amendments Regulation 2006 to transfer key management personnel remuneration disclosures, 
required by AASB 124 Related Party Disclosures paragraphs Aus 25.4 to Aus 25.7.2, to the Remuneration Report section of the Directors’ Report.

(e)  LOANS TO KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL
During the year, Metcash Limited provided a loan to H Rumpler of $93,500 repayable within 5 months at an interest rate of 6.65%. The loan was repaid 
during the year.

There are no other transactions and balances with key management personnel.

28  AUDITORS REMUNERATION

Amounts received or due and receivable by Ernst & Young (Australia) for:

—  an audit or review of the financial report of the entity and any other entity in the consolidated entity 

1,553,000 

1,455,300

—  other services in relation to the entity and any other entity

2011 
$

2010 
$

in the consolidated entity

— 

tax compliance 

—  assurance related 

Amounts received or due and receivable by related practices of Ernst & Young (Australia) for:

— 

tax compliance 

1,585,323 

1,237,065

129,900 

311,255

66,648 

10,230

3,334,871 

3,013,850

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 93

29  BUSINESS COMBINATIONS

CURRENT YEAR BUSINESS COMBINATIONS
The Group acquired the trade and assets of the following entities:

date of acQuisitioN

24 May 2010 

14 September 2010 

30 June 2010 

30 September 2010 

9 March 2011 

8 February 2011 

16 November 2010 

eNtity purchased

Cellarbrations at Sunbury Victoria (Sunbury) 

Cellarbrations at Cottlesloe Western Australia (Cottlesloe) 

G W & V Wise Pty Ltd (Echuca) 

Wallington Hardware & Timber Pty Ltd (Wallington) 

Club Partners 

Mitre 10 Bega, Eden and Pambulla (Sapphire Coast) 

Mitre 10 Narellan (Narellan) 

% acQuired

100%  (1)

100%  (1)

100%  (1) (2)

100%  (1) (2)

100%  (1)

100%  (1) (2)

100%  (1) (2)

(1)  Acquisitions of business assets
(2)  Acquisitions made by Mittenmet Limited Group — Mitre10

Details of the fair value of the assets and liabilities acquired are as follows:

(a)  Purchase consideration:

Cash paid to date 

Total purchase consideration  

Less cash acquired 

Net purchase consideration  

Fair value of net identifiable assets acquired (b)  

Goodwill  

(b)  Assets and liabilities acquired

The assets and liabilities arising from the acquisition are as follows:

Trade and other receivables 

Assets held for sale 

Property, plant and equipment  

Inventory 

Other assets 

Creditors and employee benefits provision  

Fair value of net identifiable assets acquired  

total 
$’m

 14.9

 14.9

 —

 14.9

(13.1)

 1.8

 0.2

 5.3

 1.3

 6.6

 0.4

(0.7)

 13.1

The fair value of the identifiable assets and liabilities of Sunbury, Cottlesloe, Echuca, Wallington, Club Partners, Sapphire Coast and Narellan 
approximated their carrying values at the dates of acquisition.

The results of Sunbury, Cottlesloe, Echuca, Wallington, Club Partners, Sapphire Coast and Narellan from acquisition to 30 April 2011 have not been 
disclosed separately as they are not significant to the total Group results.

The revenue and results of the total Group for the period ended 30 April 2011, as though Sunbury, Cottlesloe, Echuca, Wallington, Club Partners, 
Sapphire Coast and Narellan had been acquired on 1 May 2010, would not be significantly different from the Group results as currently reported.

The accounting for the above business combinations is provisional as at 30 April 2011.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
94

N O T E S   T O   T H E   F I N A N C I A L   R E P O R T  C O N T I N U E D

2 9  B U S I N E S S   C O M B I N AT I O N S  C O N T I N U E D

PRIOR PERIOD ACQUISITIONS
On 25 March 2010 the Group acquired 50.1% of the Mitre 10 business through the issue of ordinary shares in Mittenmet Limited, the immediate parent 
undertaking of Mitre 10. The former shareholders of Mitre 10 were issued with Convertible Redeemable Preference Shares, representing the remaining 
49.9% interest in Mittenmet Limited. The following are subsequent purchase accounting adjustments:

PURCHASE PRICE ACCOUNTING ADJUSTMENTS

 purchase coNsideratioN:

Cash paid to date 

Direct costs relating to the acquisition  

Total purchase consideration  

Less cash acquired 

Net purchase consideration  

Stamp duty and other adjustments 

Fair value of net identifiable assets acquired (see below) 

Goodwill  

Assets and liabilities acquired

The assets and liabilities arising from the acquisition are as follows:

Accounts receivable 

Prepayments 

Assets held for sale 

Property, plant and equipment  

Inventory 

Joint venture investment 

Trademark 

Customer supply contracts 

Deferred tax assets 

Other non current assets 

Fair value of forward currency contracts 

Creditors and employee benefits provision  

Borrowings 

Non controlling interest 

Fair value of net identifiable assets acquired attributable to the parent 

Notes:

 iNitial 
$’m

 55.2  

 3.4  

 58.6  

(10.9) 

 47.7  

 —  

(20.4) 

 27.3  

 fiNal 
$’m

 59.1  

 3.4  

 62.5  

(14.8) 

 47.7  

 1.3  

(15.7) 

 33.3  

 adjustmeNt 
$’m

 3.9  1

 —

 3.9

(3.9) 1

 —

 1.3  2

 4.7

 6.0

 107.7  

 107.6  

 0.1  3

 0.8  

 4.0  

 18.8  

 28.3  

 6.1  

 27.2  

 9.9  

 5.9  

 3.2  

(0.6) 

(123.0) 

(12.8) 

(55.1) 

 20.4  

 0.8  

 4.0  

 18.8  

 26.0  

 6.1  

 27.2  

 9.9  

 5.9  

 3.2  

(0.6) 

(125.3) 

(12.8) 

(55.1) 

 15.7  

 —

 —

 —

 2.3  4

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 —

 2.3  5

 —

 —

 4.7

1.  The acquisition of Mitre 10 provided for a “true up” of the final purchase consideration payable by Metcash for the partly paid shares issued by Mittenmet 
Limited. In accordance with the formula set out in the Mitre 10 Scheme Booklet the final call was determined to be $31.505m. As these amounts were 
advanced to the Mitre 10 group by Metcash Trading Limited at the date of acquisition, no additional cash flow has occurred. In addition, there has been no 
change to the business combination accounting as a result of the true up and no additional goodwill arises on this transaction.

2.   Stamp duty paid for land held in New South Wales amounted to $1.1 million
3.   Impairment adjustment required on trade debtor at completion date
4.   Adjustment to provision for impairment
5.   Adjustments to acquisition accruals and provision balances including contingent liabilities

In the prior period ended 30 April 2010, the Group acquired the assets of the following entities:

 date of acQuisitioN

11 May 2009 

1 July 2009 

25 March 2010 

12 April 2010 

eNtity purchased

Fresh Market Meat (FMM) 

Produce Traders Trust — Citi Fruit (PTT) 

Mittenmet Limited Group — Mitre 10 Australia (M10) 

Cellarbrations at Baulkham Hills New South Wales 

(1)  Acquisition of business assets.
(2)  Acquisition of majority interest. Produce Traders Trust is now 100% owned.

% acQuired

100%  (1)

60%  (2)

50.1%

100%  (1)

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 95

30  EARNINGS PER SHARE

The following reflects the income and share data used in the basic and diluted earnings per share computations:

Net profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of Metcash Limited 

Earnings used in calculating basic and diluted earnings per share 

2011 
$’m

2010 
$’m

 241.4  

 241.4  

Number

 227.6

 227.6

Number

Weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating basic earnings per share 

 767,676,470  

 765,178,865

Effect of dilutive securities

Share options and performance rights 

 1,133,920  

 1,129,914

Weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating diluted earnings per share 

768,810,390  

 766,308,779

There have been no other transactions involving ordinary shares or potential ordinary shares between the reporting date and the date of completion of 
these financial statements.

31  CONTINGENT LIABILITIES

The Group has granted bank guarantees to third parties in respect of property lease obligations to the value of 

The Group has granted bank guarantees in respect of Workcover in Western Australia 

The Group has granted stand by letter of credits 

The total face value of the outstanding charges due to American Express under the charge card arrangement is 

The Group has granted put options to third parties to the value of 

2011 
$’m

23.6 

3.8 

1.2 

253.7 

13.5 

2010 
$’m

19.2

3.2

—

146.0

13.3

AMERICAN EXPRESS CHARGE CARD
On the 9th May 2007 Metcash Trading Limited entered into an agreement with American Express (Amex), due to expire on 31 July 2012, in relation to 
customer charge cards. Under the agreement, should a customer default on payment, where Amex has previously made a payment to Metcash Trading 
Limited, then Metcash Trading Limited must pay Amex an amount equal to the charge outstanding.

The maximum amount payable shall be limited to the actual face value of the outstanding charge due to Amex. This does not include any interest or 
other fees payable by the customer to Amex. Metcash Trading Limited shall have no other obligation to Amex in respect of the outstanding charge and 
shall not be liable for any costs, loss or liability of any nature whatsoever incurred by Amex as a result of the failure by the customer to make payment.

PUT OPTIONS FOR SALE OF RETAIL STORE ASSETS
The Group has granted put options relating to the sale of retail store assets to certain customers and associates. The holders of the put option have the 
right to “put” these non-financial assets back to the Group within an agreed period and under certain prescribed circumstances. The estimate of the 
financial effect of the put options, if exercised, is the aggregate of the purchase price as defined in the option deed or business sale agreement.

AUSTRALIAN TAXATION OFFICE
Metcash has received notices of amended assessments dated 26 May 2011 and 13 June 2011 from the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) seeking 
payment of a total of $48.8 million. The amended assessments are in relation to a disputed tax liability arising from the sale of various ex-Action 
Supermarket retail businesses (Action Stores) during the 2007 and 2008 fiscal years that resulted in a net loss. The Action Stores were acquired by 
Metcash in fiscal 2006 as a part of the acquisition of Foodland Associated Limited (FAL), and were sold as part of Metcash’s ongoing business activities 
to enhance Australia’s independent retailer network. The total amount in dispute comprises primary tax of $32.9 million and then flowing from that, 
interest and penalties of $15.9 million. Metcash intends to challenge the amended assessments, which assert that the net tax losses from the sale of the 
Action Stores should be treated as being on capital account. These net tax losses were incurred as part of Metcash’s ordinary business activities and as 
such, Metcash considers the correct treatment to be on revenue account. Metcash has received external advice in relation to the dispute. Metcash has 
lodged objections to these amended assessments, and if necessary will appeal the decision to the Federal Court. Metcash is firmly of the opinion that 
the treatment it has adopted is appropriate to the circumstances. Based on the strength of its position, Metcash has not recorded an expense in relation 
to the amended assessments in the current year results presented in these financial statements.

FRANKLINS
Following the termination of the Franklins supply contract in January 2005, Franklins commenced proceedings against Metcash for unquantified 
damages, alleging failure to pass on all rebates to which Franklins was entitled. Metcash and Franklins have agreed that no further action will be taken 
regarding these proceedings, pending the outcome of the current acquisition proceedings involving the ACCC. Refer also to Note 4.

32  SUBSEQUENT EVENTS
There have been no significant events subsequent to balance date.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
96

DIRECTORs’ dEclArATioN

In accordance with a resolution of the directors of Metcash Limited, I state that:
1. 

In the opinion of the directors:
a.  The financial statements, notes and the additional disclosures included in the directors’ report designated as audited, of Metcash Limited are in 

accordance with the Corporations Act 2001, including:
i.  Giving a true and fair view of its financial position as at 30 April 2011 and of its performance for the year ended on that date; and
ii.  Complying with Accounting Standards (including the Australian Accounting Interpretations) and Corporations Regulations 2001; and

b.  The financial statements and notes also comply with international Financial Reporting Standards as disclosed in note 2(a)

c.  There are reasonable grounds to believe that the Company will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable.

2.  This declaration has been made after receiving the declarations required to be made to the directors in accordance with section 295A of the 

Corporations Act 2001 for the financial year ending 30 April 2011.

3. 

In the opinion of the directors, as at the date of this declaration, there are reasonable grounds to believe that the members of the Closed 
Group identified in note 26 will be able to meet any obligation or liabilities to which they are or may become subject, by virtue of the Deed 
of Cross Guarantee.

On behalf of the Board

Andrew Reitzer 
Director

7 July 2011

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 97

AuDITOR's iNdEpENdENcE dEclArATioN

98

INDEPENDENT AudiTor'S rEporT

M E T C A S H   A N N U A L   R E P O R T   2 0 1 1 99

I N D E P E N D E N T  AU D I T O R'S R E P O R T C O N T I N U E D

100

AsX AddiTioNAl iNforMATioN

Year ended 30 April 2011

Additional information required by the Australian Stock Exchange and not shown elsewhere in this report is as follows.

The information is current as at 7 July 2011.

(a)  DISTRIBUTION OF EQUITY SECURITIES
The number of shareholders, by size of holding, in each class of share are:

 size of holdiNg

1—1,000 

1,001—5,000 

5,001—10,000 

10,001—100,000 

100,001—9,999,999,999 

Total 

There were 535 shareholders holding less than a marketable parcel of Metcash ordinary shares.

(b)  TWENTY LARGEST SHAREHOLDERS
The names of the 20 largest holders of quoted shares are:

 Name

HSBC CUSTODY NOMINEES (AUSTRALIA) LIMITED 

NATIONAL NOMINEES LIMITED 

J P MORGAN NOMINEES AUSTRALIA LIMITED 

CITICORP NOMINEES PTY LIMITED 

CITICORP NOMINEES PTY LIMITED  

RBC DEXIA INVESTOR SERVICES AUSTRALIA NOMINEES PTY LIMITED  

COGENT NOMINEES PTY LIMITED 

AMP LIFE LIMITED 

JP MORGAN NOMINEES AUSTRALIA LIMITED  

COGENT NOMINEES PTY LIMITED  

RBC DEXIA INVESTOR SERVICES AUSTRALIANOMINEES PTY LIMITED 

AUSTRALIAN FOUNDATION INVESTMENT COMPANY LIMITED 

MILTON CORPORATION LIMITED 

CITICORP NOMINEES PTY LIMITED  

RBC DEXIA INVESTOR SERVICES AUSTRALIA NOMINEES PTY LIMITED  

QUEENSLAND INVESTMENT CORPORATION 

BOND STREET CUSTODIANS LIMITED  

CITICORP NOMINEES PTY LIMITED  

CITICORP NOMINEES PTY LIMITED  

CITICORP NOMINEES PTY LIMITED  

(c)  SUBSTANTIAL SHAREHOLDERS
The following is extracted from the Company’s register of substantial shareholders:

Deutsche Bank AG 

Maple-Brown Abbott Limited 

National Australia Bank Limited Group 

Westpac Banking Corporation (BT Investment Mgt) 

Commonwealth Bank of Australia 

(d)  VOTING RIGHTS
All ordinary shares (whether fully paid or not) carry one vote per share without restriction.

Number of 
shareholders

8,079

21,537

6,464

4,255

154

40,489

Number  
of shares

perceNtage  
of shares

195,541,168 

100,218,015 

87,675,307 

37,683,082 

18,499,715 

16,615,246 

8,832,533 

7,698,893 

5,990,487 

5,196,192 

5,002,259 

4,750,000 

4,520,560 

4,300,000 

2,961,435 

2,873,314 

2,279,951 

2,232,000 

2,194,380 

2,134,938 

25.430

13.033

11.402

4.901

2.406

2.161

1.149

1.001

0.779

0.676

0.651

0.618

0.588

0.559

0.385

0.374

0.297

0.290

0.285

0.278

517,199,475 

67.263

Number  
of shares

47,922,622

46,258,072

45,834,093

42,855,586

38,417,050

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
P r i ce

&  

Ran g e

Metcash Limited

Metcash is Australia’s leading wholesale 

distribution and marketing company specialising 

in grocery, fresh produce, liquor, other fast 

moving consumer goods and hardware. We thank 

our diverse network of customers, suppliers, 

employees and the community for making Metcash 

the company it is today.

LINKED TOGETHER 

IN THE SPIRIT OF THE 

INDEPENDENTS • GIVING INDEPENDENT RETAILERS THE SUPPORT TO GROW.

• DEFENSIVE QUALITIES OF OUR BUSINESS AS WE SELL EVERYDAY NEEDS.

• RESILIENCE OF OUR BUSINESS MODEL AS WE PROVIDE WORLD CLASS 

  LOGISTICS, BUYING STRENGTH, MARKETING & BRAND-BUILDING 

  AND THE RETAILER PROVIDES ENTREPRENEURIAL SPIRIT.

Business Model

Warehouses & Distribution

Our operations are supported by world class 

distribution, logistics and warehousing capabilities. 

Our logistical excellence is achieved through strong 

relationships with our suppliers and investment in 

technology and infrastructure, enabling reduced 

costs and greater effi ciencies.

Australian Liquor Marketers (ALM)

ALM is a broad range liquor wholesaler supplying 

hotels, liquor stores, restaurants and other licensed 

premises throughout Australia and New Zealand. ALM 

also markets three major independent retail brands 

across Australia.

Mitre 10

In March 2010, Metcash acquired a 50.1% stake in 

the Mitre 10 Group. Mitre 10 is the second largest 

business in the Australian home improvement and 

hardware industry. It operates as a wholesale supplier 

to the independently owned Mitre 10 retailers who 

sell home improvement and hardware products.

Community

Key to our success is being part of the community 

and understanding what matters to local 

consumers. We support the communities in which 

we live through our engagement programs by giving 

back through donations and other support.

CORPORATE INFORMATION

ABN 32 112 073 480

DIRECTORS
Peter Barnes (Chairman)
Andrew Reitzer (CEO)
Fiona Balfour
Michael Butler
Neil Hamilton
Edwin Jankelowitz
Richard Longes
V Dudley Rubin

COMPANY SECRETARY
Greg Watson

REGISTERED OFFICE
50 Waterloo Road
Macquarie Park NSW 2113

Telephone: 61 2 9751 8200

SHARE REGISTER
Boardroom Pty Limited
GPO Box 3993
Sydney NSW 2001

Telephone: 61 2 9290 9600
Facsimile: 61 2 9279 0664

AUDITOR
Ernst & Young

INTERNET ADDRESS
www.metcash.com

NATIONAL OFFICE
Ph: 61 2 9751 8200
Fax: 61 2 9741 3027

50 Waterloo Road
Macquarie Park NSW 2113

CAMPBELLS WHOLESALE HEAD OFFICE
Ph: 61 2 9741 3000
Fax: 61 2 9751 8298

4 Newington Road
Silverwater NSW 2128

Postal Address
PO Box 6226
Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

Postal Address
PO Box 6226
Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

IGA DISTRIBUTION HEAD OFFICE
Ph: 61 2 9751 8200
Fax: 61 2 9741 3055

MITRE 10 HEAD OFFICE
Ph: 61 3 9703 4200
Fax: 61 3 9703 4222

12 Dansu Court
Hallam VIC 3803

Postal Address
Locked Bag 10
Doveton VIC 3177

50 Waterloo Road
Macquarie Park NSW 2113

Postal Address
PO Box 6226
Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

AUSTRALIAN LIQUOR MARKETERS 
HEAD OFFICE
Ph: 61 2 9741 3000
Fax: 61 2 9741 3009

4 Newington Road
Silverwater NSW 2128

Postal Address
PO Box 6226
Silverwater Business Centre NSW 1811

IGA Distribution (IGA>D)

IGA>D provides independent retailers with the 

brand, marketing and buying scale necessary 

to compete in a highly concentrated retail 

market. From its six major distribution centres, 

IGA>D distributes grocery products and general 

merchandise across Australia. IGA Fresh distributes 

fresh produce from eight major facilities and meat 

from its ‘state of the art’ centre in Western Australia.

Campbells Wholesale

Campbells Wholesale is a multi-format distributor 

of grocery, general merchandise, confectionery, 

foodservice and liquor products. It services small 

business customers and retailers across Australia, 

leveraging its ability to offer a supply solution to 

nationally based customers. 

Our Customers

Our success is measured by the success of our 

customers – the independent retailers. For the most 

part, these are business owners operating stores in 

their local neighbourhoods – the face of the business 

and part of the community. We support our customers 

by providing a quality offering of products and 

services, including our own private labelled products, 

at competitive prices, allowing them to compete and 

grow their own businesses.

Our People

Our people are the bedrock of our organisation. 

Crucial to our ability to support our customers is the 

continuous development and support of our internal 

human resources. Our staff are supported through 

talent management, leadership development, 

employee engagement and workplace relations.

The cover and text sections of this report are printed on Mega Recycled Silk A2+, an 
environmentally considered sheet consisting of 50% post consumer recycled waste 
and 50% FSC certifi ed fi bre. Mega Recycled is manufactured at the mill, which has its 
own waste water treatment plant and are ISO 14001 EMS approved. Mega Recycled 
is made elemental chlorine free.

The back section of this report is printed on Grange Laser which is PEFC certifi ed. 
With ISO 14001 EMS accreditation, this wood free sheet is also made elemental 
chlorine free.

D E S I G N E D   A N D   P R O D U C E D   B Y   D E S I G N A T E   I N V E S T O R

M

E

T

C

A

S

H

L

I

M

I

T

E

D

A

N

N

U

A

L

R

E

P

O

R

T

2

0

1

1

www.metcash.com

Annual Report 

Collective

2011

STRENGTH

Independent

SPIRIT